HomeMy WebLinkAboutReport (37) C��'� 1-� cin !� 1��'
Offs MA�Y
' 2�13 2019 ®
DIVISioN
PROJECT MANUAL BUCITYILDING TIGARD
FOR
1 TIGARD TOWN SQUARE
LANDLORD'S RENOVATIONS
i
IN PREPARATION
FOR THE PROPOSED TENANTS
FOR
1
Helsin Holdings, Inc.
23421 South Pointe Drive
Suite 270
'Laguna Hills, CA 92653
1
BY
TILAND / SCHMIDT ARCHITECTS P.C.
3611 SW Hood Avenue
Suite 200
' Portland, Oregon 97239
TSA PROJECT NO: 19105
' May 2019
i
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
TIGARD TOWN SQUARE
LANDLORD'S RENOVATIONS
IN PREPARATION
FOR THE PROPOSED TENANTS
I
FOR
1
Helsin Holdings, Inc.
23421 South Pointe Drive
Suite 270
Laguna Hills, CA 92653
I
' BY
TILAND / SCHMIDT ARCHITECTS P.C.
3611 SW Hood Avenue
Suite 200
Portland, Oregon 97239
' TSA PROJECT NO: 19105
May 2019
I
SECTION 00 00 02-PARTICIPANTS
MAN
PROJECT AL
U
FOR
TIGARD TOWN SQUARE
LANDLORD'S RENOVATIONS
i IN PREPARATION
FOR THE PROPOSED TENANTS
1
OWNER/ LANDLORD:
Helsin Holdings, Inc.
23421 South Pointe Drive
' Suite 270
Laguna Hills, CA 92653
ARCHITECT:
TILAND/SCHMIDT ARCHITECTS,P.C.
3611 SW Hood Avenue
Suite 200
Portland, Oregon 97239
' (503)220-8517
' CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL:
VLMK
3933 SW Kelly Avenue
' Portland, OR 97239
(971)254-8278
ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL ENGINEERS:
MKE ASSOCIATES, INC.
I
6915 SW Macadam Avenue
Suite 200
Portland,Oregon 97219
' (503) 892-1188
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
' TABLE OF CONTENTS
' TIGARD TOWN SQUARE RENOVATIONS
TIGARD,OREGON
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO. 19105
INTRODUCTORY PAGES
' 00 00 00 COVER
00 00 02 PARTICIPANTS
00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
' DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00 01 11 LIST OF DRAWINGS
00 01 12 INVITATION TO BID
00 01 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
' 00 10 05 BID FORM
00 10 10 SUMMARY OF WORK
00 10 14 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
00 10 15 AGREEMENT FORM
00 10 17 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
00 17 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
00 60 00 PROJECT FORMS
' 00 73 19 JOBSITE SAFETY RULES
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
'
01 21 00 ALLOWANCES
01 22 00 UNIT PRICES
01 23 00 ALTERNATES
01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
' 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 42 00 REFERENCES
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILI PIES AND CONTROLS
01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 73 00 EXECUTION
01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 78 23 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA
' DIVISION 2 SITEWORK—NOT USED
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE—NOT USED
tDIVISION 4 MASONRY—NOT USED
1
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 5 METALS '
05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS —NOT USED
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS
07 26 00 VAPOR BARRIER
07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 71 60 DAMPPROOFING
07 71 90 WA 1'ER REPELLANTS
07 79 00 JOINT SEALERS
DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS—NOT USED
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 PAINTS AND COATINGS
DIVISIONS 10 THRU 20 NOT USED
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION ,
21 00 01 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS
21 05 00 FIRE PROTECTIONH BASIC MATERIALS AN METHODS
21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 1
22 00 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
22 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 05 19 GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 49 PLUMING SEISMIC RESTRAINT
22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 06 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
•
DIVISION 23 HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING(HVAC)
Page 2 of 3
SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 23 00 00 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 49 HVAC SEISMIC RESTRAINT
23 05 53 IDENTIFICATIION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93 TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION
' 23 10 05 FUEL PIPING
23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 74 12 PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS—SMALL CAPACITY
23 8127 SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
' 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 34 CONDUIT
26 05 37 BOXES
26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
' 26 09 18 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM ADDED: ADDENDUM NO.2,dated 5-8-18
26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS
' 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS
26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
26 29 13 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLS
26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS
26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 5100 LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
27 10 05 LOW-VOLTAGE CABLE PATHWAYS
' 27 13 43 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL
28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
28 3100 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
' DIVISION 30 DRAINAGE
30 26 21 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE
APPENDIX'A'
' GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
Page 3 of 3
1
SECTION 00 01 12 INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 00 01 12 INVITATION TO BID
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:
A. Owner: Heslin Holdings,Inc.
B. Architect: Tiland/Schmidt Architects,P.C.
3611 SW Hood Avenue,
Suite 200
Portland,Oregon 97239
' C. Project: Tigard Town Square Renovations
Tigard,Oregon
1.02 INVITATION:
* A. Bidders Invitation:
1. A single selected Contractor is being invited to bid on a General Contract.
' * B. Project Description:
1. Renovations related to the preparation of the building for future tenants.
• 1
2. Connect all items and material as shown on the related architectural, structural,
plumbing and electrical documents.
' 1.03 ACCESS TO BIDDING DOCUMENTS
A. Additional Sets and Parts of Sets:
1. Additional sets or parts of sets will be made available upon request at the cost of
reproduction and handling,which is not refundable. General Contractors or
' Subcontractors shall pay directly for additional or partial sets.
Contact: Precision Images,Inc.
' 900 SE Sandy Blvd.
Portland,OR 97214
503-274-2030
1.04 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
' A. Bid Type: As Indicated.
B. Bid Form: Submit bid proposal on forms included in the Bidding Documents.
•
END OF SECTION
1
' Page 1 of 1
SECTION 00 01 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
I
SECTION 00 01 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
I
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I1. Defined terms. `
2. Copies of bidding documents.
3. Qualifications of bidders.
I 4. Examination of contract documents and site.
5. Interpretations and addenda.
6. Contract time.
I
7. Substitute or"or-equal" items.
8. Subcontractors,suppliers and others.
9. Bid form.
I 10.Submission of bids.
11.Modification and withdrawal of bids.
12.Opening of bids.
I 13.Bids to remain subject to acceptance.
14.Award of contract.
15.Signing of agreement.
I
1.2 DEFINED TERMS
A. Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders are defined in the Standard General Conditions
I of these Construction Contract Documents. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a
Bid directly to the Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The
term "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to
I whom the Owner (on the basis of the Owner's evaluations hereinafter provided) makes an
award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to
Bidders,the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents(including all Addenda issued
Iprior to receipt of Bids).
1.3 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
IA. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor
Architect assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
B. The Owner and Architect in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above
terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license
or grant for any other use.
I1.4 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
I A. To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must be prepared to submit
within five days of the Owner's request, written evidence, such as financial data, previous
experience, present commitments and other such data as may be called for below (or in the
I
Supplementary Instructions). Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do
IPage 1 of 6
SECTION 00 01 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
business in the State where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification '
prior to award of the contract(per information required of Bidder).
1.5 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
A. It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid,to: '
1. examine the Contract Documents thoroughly,
2. visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress,
performance or furnishing of the Work,
3. consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress,
performance or furnishing of the Work,
4. study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
5. notify Architect of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
B. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground '
Facilities at the site is based upon information and data furnished to the Owner. The Owner
does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof.
C. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to
determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price ,
and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
D. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other land designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of material and equipment are to be provided by
Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures
are to be obtained and paid for by the Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents.
E. The submission of Bid will represent that the Bidder has complied with every requirement
needed to perform and furnish the Work required by the Contract Documents. In addition
the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction are the
responsibility of the General Contractor, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in
scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for
performance and furnishing of the Work. '
1.6 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
A. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to
Architect. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Architect in response to
such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by
Architect as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than five days
prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by
Page 2 of 6
111
ISECTION 00 01 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will
be without legal effect.
I- : B. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
Owner or Architect.
I1.7 CONTRACT TIME
A. The numbers of days within, or the dates by which, the Work is to be completed and ready
Ifor final payment are set forth in the Bid Form and the Agreement.
SUBSTITUTE OR"OR-EQUAL"ITEMS
I1.8
A. The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
I "or-equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by
Contractor if acceptable to Architect, application for such acceptance will not be considered
Iby Architect until after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
1.9 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
IA. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of
I
material and equipment)to be submitted to the Owner in advance of a specified date or prior
to the Effective Date of the Agreement, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other
Bidder so requested, shall within seven days after the Bid opening or prior to said date,
submit to the Owner a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and
I organizations proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is
required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent
information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such
I Subcontractor, Supplier, person or organization if requested by the Owner. If the Owner or
Architect after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor,
Supplier, other person or organization, the Owner may,before the Notice of Award is given,
I request the apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, or if apparent
Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the Owner may award the
Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposed to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers
I
and other persons or organizations. The declining to make requested substitution will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor,
Supplier, other person or organization listed and to whom the Owner or Architect does not
make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable
11 to the Owner and Architect subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date
of the Agreement.
I B. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or
organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
1
I
i
Page 3 of 6
SECTION 00 01 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.10 BID FORM
A. The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents. '
B. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter.
C. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer'accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary of assistant secretary. The '
corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature.
D. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,
whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership must
be shown below the signature.
E. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. '
F. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the number of which
must be filled in on the Bid Form).
1.11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS '
A. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be
enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project Title (and, if applicable, the
designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name and address of
the Bidder and other required documents referred to in the Bid Form. If the Bid is sent
through the mail or other delivery system the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate
envelope with the notation"Bid Enclosed" on the face of it.
1.12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS '
A. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
B. If, within twenty-four hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written '
notice with the Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of
the Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that
Bidder may withdraw its Bid. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further
bidding on the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents.
1.13 OPENING OF BIDS
A. Bids will be opened and(unless obviously non-responsive)read privately. An abstract of the
amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders
after the opening of Bids.
Page 4 of 6 '
1 SECTION 00 01 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
I
I1.14 BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
A. All bids will remain subject to acceptance for thirty (30) days after the day of the Bid
u
opening,but the Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid prior to that date.
1.15 AWARD OF CONTRACT
IA. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities
not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the
Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all non-conforming, non-responsive,
I unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, the owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any
Bidder if the Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make
an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is
I unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or
criteria established by the Owner. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work and
unit prices will be resolved in favor of the units of Work. Discrepancies between the
I indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor
of the correct sum.
I B. In evaluating Bids, the Owner will consider the qualification of the Bidders, whether or not
the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other
data,as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
I
C. The Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
Other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the
identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers,and other persons and organizations must be submitted
I as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. The Owner also may consider the operating
costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of
materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required
Ito be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
D. The Owner may conduct such investigations as the Owner deems necessary to assist in the
I evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability
of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons or organizations to
perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the Owner's
satisfaction within the prescribed time.
I
E. If the contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation by
the Owner indicates to the Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Project.
I
1.16 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
I A. When the Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied
by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written
Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen days thereafter Contractor shall sign and
I deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to the
Owner. Within ten days thereafter the Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to
Contractor. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the Contract
1 Documents with appropriate identification.
I
Page 5 of 6
SECTION 00 01 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1
1.17 ASSISTED COLLABORATION
A. For the purposes of this bid and the subsequent evaluation and use,the Bidders shall not use
or calculate the possible use of any collective bargaining agreements, or subsidies. All bids
will be accepted from the pre-selected contractor list without regard to gender, race, creed,
etc. This contract and all associated subcontracts shall follow all rules and regulations set
forth by the Local, State and Federal Agencies, governing the Equal Opportunity
Regulations. 1
1
i
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
Page 6 of 6
ISECTION 00 10 10 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY SECTION 00 10 10 SUMMARY OF WORK
' A. Section Includes:
1. Work by Contractor.
2. Work under Separate Documents.
3. Definitions.
4. Contractor use of site and premises.
1 5. Work Sequence.
1.02 WORK BY CONTRACTOR
' A. The work of this Contract addresses the renovation to the existing structure previously occupied
by a grocery store. The scope of work includes the preparation of the building for the future
' Planet Fitness Tenant on the west side and for a future tenant still unknown on the east side as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
B. Additional requirements of all parties to the Contract shall be as outlined in the GENERAL
CONDITIONS.
' C. Contractor's Duties:
1. Provide and pay for labor, materials, tools, equipment, superintendence, temporary
facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of work.
2. The Owner to pay the general contractor for sales tax at each progress billing.
' 3. Coordinate and arrange for:
a. Plan Check and Permits for all Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing work
including payment of the same.
' b. Utility hook-ups, including water meters,pits meter valves, sanitary sewer,etc.
c. All other required permits,governmental fees and licenses.
4. Owner will pay for:
a. Plan Check and Building Permit.
b. Utility hook-up fees.
5. Comply with building codes, ordinances and regulations of public authorities.
' 1.03 WORK UNDER SEPARATE DOCUMENTS
I A. To be determined.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
' A. General Requirements: Provisions or requirements of Divisions 1 sections apply to entire
Contract.
B. Directed, Requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed",
"requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and"permitted" mean
"directed by Architect", "requested by Architect", etc. However, no such implied meaning will
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 00 10 10 SUMMARY OF WORK
be interpreted to extend Architect's responsibility into Contractor's area of construction 1
supervision and material quality control.
C. Furnish: Expect as otherwise defined in greater detail, "furnish" is used to mean supply and 1
deliver products to project site,ready for unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in
each instance.
D. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail "install" is used to describe operations at
project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying,
working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as
applicable in each instance.
E. Provide: Except as otherwise noted defined in greater detail, "provide" means to furnish and
install, complete and ready for intended use,as applicable in each instance.
1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Coordinate use of Site and premises to allow:
1. Adjacent occupancies,
2. Work by Others.
B. Confine operations at Site to areas permitted by:
1. Law.
2. Ordinances.
3. Permits.
4. Contract Documents. 1
C. Construction Operations:
1. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials and/or equipment.
2. Do not load structure with weight which could endanger people, land or structures.
D. Time Restrictions for Perfoiuung Work: As required by local governing jurisdiction and by
Covenant and Conditions for the property.
E. Storage:
1. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises.
2. Move stored products which interfere with operations of Owner or Owner's Contractors.
3. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas required by operations.
1.06 SEQUENCE AND STAGING
A. The work sequence will need to be well organized manner.
B. The General Contractor will need to place and control the overall staging areas to accommodate
the building contractors and work including utility connections & coordination and cooperation
with site contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION(Not Applicable) 1
END OF SECTION
Pageo
2 f2
SECTION 00 17 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1
SECTION 00 17 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1 1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
B. Related Sections:
' 1. Section 01 33 00—Submittal Procedures
2. Section 01 77 00—Closeout Procedures
' 1.2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on Site, one set of following Record Documents;record actual revisions to Work:
' 1. Contract Drawings.
2. PPoject Manual(Conditions of Contract and Specifications.)
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to Contract.
5. Reviewed Shop Drawings,product data,and samples.
6. Field test records.
B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.
C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products
installed,including following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
F. Architect will arrange for the Contractor to obtain the latest drawings for transfer record
drawing information by the Contractor.
' Page 1 of 3
SECTION 00 17 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
I
G. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment.
H. MARK "As-Built" AND DATE ON DOCUMENTS IN LOWER RIGHT-HAND CORNER
AND PROVIDE ONE FULL SET OF PRINTS, AND (3) HYPERLINKED DIGITAL
COPIES.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit one set 15 days prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D
side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers.
•
B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are
required, or Digital Copies as determined by the Owner.
C. Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified,
typed on 24 pound white paper.
D. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below; with tab titles clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,
Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates,including following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
e. List of spare parts and maintenance materials.
E. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. This
copy will be returned with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior
to final submittal.
F. SUBMIT REQUESTED DOCUMENTAION WITHIN TEN DAYS PRIOR TO FINAL
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND AFTER FINAL INSPECTION.
I
Page 2 of 3 ,
SECTION 00 17 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
I
1.7 WARRANTIES
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.
B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
C. Provide project cover, Table of Contents, tabulated list of products, beginning date and
' expiration date for warranties and name and address of party to contact in case of claim against
warranty.
D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal
within ten days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.8 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
' A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials, with labels, in quantities
specified in individual specification Sections.
B. Deliver to Owner's storage area and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final
payment.
C. Tabulate list of spare parts and maintenance materials. Indicate product description,
Specifications paragraph listing product, and quantity of product delivered to the Owner.
Include list at end of"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION"binder.
1.9 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL:
A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and
maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment
and systems.
B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction.
1. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of
operations and maintenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
1 PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
111 END OF SECTION
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 00 60 00 PROJECT FORMS
SECTION 00 60 00 PROJECT FORMS
' 1.1 FORM OF AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS
' A. The following form of Owner/Contractor Agreement and form of the General Conditions shall
be used for Project:
' 1. The General Conditions will be provided by the owner,and/or be included within the
project manual.
' 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE FORMS
A. Administrative Forms: Additional administrative forms are specified in Division 01 General
Requirements.
B. Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects;
' http://www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; docspurchases@aia.org; (800) 942-7732.
C. Preconstruction Forms:
' 1. Form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Bond: AIA Document A312,
"Performance Bond and Payment Bond."
2. Form of Certificate of Insurance: AIA Document G715, "Supplemental Attachment for
ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S."
I D. Information and Modification Forms:
1. Form for Requests for Information(RFIs): AIA Document G716, "Request for
Information(RFI)."
1111 2. Form of Request for Proposal: AIA Document G709, "Work Changes Proposal Request."
3. Change Order Form: AIA Document G701, "Change Order."
4. Form of Architect's Memorandum for Minor Changes in the Work: AIA Document
G707, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
5. Foul'of Change Directive: AIA Document G714, "Construction Change Directive."
E. Payment Forms:
1. Schedule of Values Form: AIA Document G703, "Continuation Sheet."
' 2. Payment Application: AIA Document G702/703, "Application and Certificate for
Payment and Continuation Sheet."
3. Form of Contractor's Affidavit: AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment
of Debts and Claims."
4. Form of Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of
Payment of Release of Liens."
5. Form of Consent of Surety: AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
END OF SECTION
I
Page 1 of 1
1
SECTION 00 73 19 JOBSITE SAFETY RULES
SECTION 00 73 19—JOBSITE SAFETY RULES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL RULES
A. The Owner will not permit any person or organization to jeopardize the safety or well-being of
any employee or invitee on the Owner's premises because of the willful or negligent disregard
' or negligence of sound, established safety rules. All federal, state, local, and OSHA safety rules
must be observed.
B. All OSHA standards applicable to the Project, methods and locations must be followed. Any
noticed infractions or violations of these standards will be brought to the attention of the person
in charge for immediate correction.
C. The Contractor shall provide and require the use of conventional fall protection, i.e. personal
fall arrest systems, safety net systems or guardrails systems as defined in 29 CFR 1926.502
when its employees are performing construction work that is in excess of six feet above a lower
level.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
1
I
END OF SECTION
Page 1 of 1
ISECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES
I
SECTION 01 21 00-ALLOWANCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
I1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
B. Types of allowances include the following:
1 1. Lump-sum allowances.
2. Unit-cost allowances.
I 3. Quantity allowances.
4. Contingency allowances.
5. Testing and inspecting allowances.
IC. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices.
I 2. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances
for testing and inspecting.
I1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advice Architect of the date when final
Iselection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed
to avoid delaying the Work.
I B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.
Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
, i1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
specified for Change Orders.
lir' 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for
Iuse in fulfillment of each allowance.
B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of
Iallowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of
ithe Work.
I012100 - 1
SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES
1.5 COORDINATION '
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to
coordinate installation.
1.6 ALLOWANCES '
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner
or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to
I
Project site.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor,
installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by
Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the
allowance.
C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or
supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner.
Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.
I
1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by
Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner I
under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract
Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, takes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar
costs. '
C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include
Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. I
D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner
by Change Order.
1.8 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES
A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies,actual tests and
inspections, and reporting results.
B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for
retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist
the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.
C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.
I
01 21 00 -2 '
1 SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES
D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to
Owner by Change Order.
I
1.9 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
IA. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based
on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement
of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting
Ilosses,tolerances, mixing wastes,normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
I
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
IB. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's
Ihandling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what
could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-
priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
I PART
3 -EXECUTION
TION
I3.1 EXAMINATION
I A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return
damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
I3.2 PREPARATION
I A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.
I3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
IA. Allowance No. 1 To be determined
IEND OF SECTION 01 21 00
1 012100 -3
SECTION 01 22 00 UNIT PRICES
1
SECTION 01 22 00 -UNIT PRICES
' PART 1 -GENERAL
NERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Related Requirements:
1 1. Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and
handling Change Orders.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
' A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion
of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the
scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are
increased or decreased.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
' applicable taxes,overhead,and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified
' in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
' D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections
referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
1 PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES TO BE DETERMINED
END OF SECTION 01 22 00
012200 - 1
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 25 00-SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
' PART 1 -GENERAL
1 1.1 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
' A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration.Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.
' 1. Substitution Request Form:Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
' b. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
c. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
d. Samples,where applicable or requested.
e. Certificates and qualification data,where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
I results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from applicable code authorities.
012500 - 1
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed '
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
j. Cost information,including a proposal of change,if any,in the Contract Sum.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. '
1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results. ,
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation,whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the r
following conditions are satisfied:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce I
indicated results.
b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
012500-2 '
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
' B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.
' PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
1
1
I
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
012500 -3
SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 26 00 -CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
' A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
' A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary,the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
' 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in
progress or to execute the proposed change.
' 2. Within seven days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
' a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
' b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship.Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require
modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a
' change to the Architect.
' Page 1 of 3
SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
1
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change
on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,with total amount
of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental,and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 111
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,
including,but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity
relationship.Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed '
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use a form acceptable to Architect. '
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS '
A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of
allowances.
B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope
of unit-price work.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request,Architect will issue a Change Order
for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE '
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA
Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change
in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
B. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also
designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1
Page 2 of 3
111
SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
I
1. After completion of change,submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
1
1
I
I
END OF SECTION
111
Page 3 of 3
I
SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
I
1 SECTION 01 29 00 -PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
IA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
IB. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and
Iprocessing of allowances.
2. Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit
Iprices.
3. Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
Ihandling changes to the Contract.
4. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
1 governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
IA. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
I1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules,including the following:
Ia. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
I
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
I
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliestp ossible date but no later than seven
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
I3. Sub schedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
separately phased payments, provide sub schedules showing values coordinated with
each phase of payment.
IPage 1 of 5
I
I
SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location. ,
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number. ,
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of MA Document G703.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project
Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts
in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under Project closeout requirements in an amount 1
totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. '
5. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion,and for total installed value of that part of the Work. t
6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. '
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
or distributed as general overhead expense,at Contractor's option.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1
Page 2 of 5 ,
1
I
SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
I
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
IA. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
I 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion,and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
I B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
IC. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 25th of the
month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last
day of the month.
ID. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form
.for Applications for Payment.
I
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
Iapplications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
IUse updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
Iday of construction period covered by application.
F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment
to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
Iattachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
Iinformation about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
I lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related
to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
Ideduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
Iwaivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
Iwaivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
IPage 3 of 5
I
1
SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values. I
3. Contractor's construction schedule(preliminary if not fmal).
4. Schedule of unit prices. '
5. Submittal schedule(preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
10. Initial progress report. I
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion
for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. ,
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including,but not limited,to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement,accounting for fmal changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
Page 4 of 5 1
1
r
SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
r
6. Evidence that claims have been settled.
r7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
r8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
rPART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
r
r
r
r
i
r
r
r
END OF SECTION
r
Page 5 of 5
r
ISECTION 01 31 00-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
I
SECTION 01 31 00-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
I1.1 SUMMARY
I A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to,the following:
I1. Coordination drawings.
2. Requests for Information(RFIs).
3. Project meetings.
I1.2 DEFINITIONS
I A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract
Documents.
I1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
I A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
I1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract.
I3. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate,covered by subcontract.
1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection,and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
I 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance,service,and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
IB. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination.Include such items as required notices,reports,and list of attendees at
Imeetings.
iPage 1 of 6
SECTION 01 31 00—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their 1
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative I
procedures with other construction activities,and activities of other contractors, to avoid
conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but
are not limited to,the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where
limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate
integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information,as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, I
structural, civil,mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract. I
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION(RFIs) 1
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
t
Page 2 of 6 i
ISECTION 01 31 00—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
I1. Project name.
2. Project number.
I 3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
I 6. RFI number,numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate.
111 10. Field dimensions and conditions,as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum,Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
1 12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
Ineeding interpretation.
C. RFI Forms: As developed by the general contractor.
ID. Architect's and Construction Manager's Action: Architect and Construction Manager will
review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow five working days for
I Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect or Construction Manager after
1:00 p.m.will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
Ia. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
I c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
I e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
I 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal.
IE. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly.
1-
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
I 3. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
1 6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's and Construction Manager's response was received.
I
111 Page 3 of 6
SECTION 01 31 00—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
F. On receipt of Architect's and Construction Manager's action, update the RFI log and '
immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify
Architect and Construction Manager within five days if Contractor disagrees with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
1.7 PROJECT WEB SITE
A. Use Project Web as directed by the Owner. The site is established for purposes of hosting and
managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site
shall include the following functions:
1. Project directory. '
2. Project correspondence.
3. Meeting minutes.
4. Contract modifications forms and logs.
5. RFI forms and logs.
6. Task and issue management.
7. Photo documentation.
8. Schedule and calendar management.
9. Submittals forms and logs.
10. Payment application forms.
11. Drawing and specification document hosting,viewing, and updating.
12. Online document collaboration.
13. Reminder and tracking functions.
14. Archiving functions.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS 1
A. General: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project
site unless otherwise indicated. I
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved.Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a preconstruction
conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the individuals required to
attend.
1. Attendees: Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to111
conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress,including the following:
1
Page 4 of 6 i
1 SECTION 01 31 00-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1 a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
I c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
e. Procedures for RFIs.
I f. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
h. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
i. Submittal procedures.
j. Preparation of record documents.
k. Use of the premises.
1. Work restrictions.
I m. Working hours.
n. Owner's occupancy requirements.
o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
I p. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
q. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
r. Construction waste management and recycling.
s. Parking availability.
t. Office,work, and storage areas.
u. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
I
v. First aid.
w. Security.
x. Progress cleaning.
I 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
IC. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings as desired by the owner.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, each contractor, subcontractor,
I supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,
coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings.
All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude
II matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
Contractor'sin
a. Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
p �'
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
11 in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
Isubsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
Ib. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
I
uPage 5 of 6
SECTION 01 31 00—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) ,
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
I
I
Page 6 of 6
SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 01 32 00 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Construction schedule updating reports.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Site condition reports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file,where indicated.
2. PDF electronic file.
3. Two paper copies.
' B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction
period. Show logic ties for activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
t
Page 1 of 5
1
SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to 1
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)
and date on label.
D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for
each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration,
remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total
float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date,or actual start date if known. I
E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. 1
G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, 1
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports. 1
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE,GENERAL I
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final
completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date,unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 1
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1
1. Activity Duration: Define separate activity durations.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals,purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Page 2 of 5
1
SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33
00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's
construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
1 C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule,and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
I1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion,and final completion.
E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
11111
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
Page 3 of 5
1
SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 111
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's construction schedule within 15 days of date established for Notice to Proceed.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. I
1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 1
C. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect
of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 1
2. Description of activity.
3. Main events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
10. Dollar value of activity(coordinated with the schedule of values).
E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 111
4. Equipment at Project site.
I
Page 4 of 5
1
SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1 5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
Isnow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
I 9. Unusual events.
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages,and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
I 16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
1 19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
I the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
IPART 3 -EXECUTION
I3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
I A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At Weekly to Monthly intervals,update schedule
to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at each regularly scheduled
project meeting.
I1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
I such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to,changes in logic,durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses,indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
Ischedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
I 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
IEND OF SECTION 01 32 00
I
Page 5 of 5
I
ISECTION 01 33 00—SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1
SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
--L PART 1 -GENERAL
1 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1 1.2 DEFINITIONS
I A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that required the
Construction Manager's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
I require Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not
complying with requirements.
I1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
I A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect or Construction Manager and
Iadditional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
I1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings
Iwill be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
IDrawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
ir
b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form
acceptable to Owner and Architect.
I B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
I 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity.
I
IPage 1 of 3
SECTION 01 33 00—SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination. ,
a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Construction Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension
of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect or Construction
Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary,process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 5 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, and installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for
performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I
E. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's or Construction Manager's
action stamp.
PART 2-PRODUCTS ,
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES I
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
1. Submit via email to the Architect and Owner's Representative.
2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. The Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
3. Action Submittals: Submit via email.
4. Informational Submittals: Submit via email.
5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
111
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity. I
r
Page 2 of 3 '
SECTION 01 33 00—SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
' other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions.Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
' B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00
"Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
' A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Construction Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect or Construction Manager will stamp
each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review. Should submittal be a part of a whole, Document so it is clear.
' Reviewer has the right to hold all parts until all are received or review and return as a whole.
E. The general contractor is responsible for making sure all submittals are complete and approved
11 before sending to the Architect for review.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be reviewed to ensure the proper
materials are selected.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
I
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
I
SECTION 01 40 00-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
l B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
' 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
' 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
I execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
comply
completed construction 1Y requirements.uirements. Services do not include contract
P p
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups:Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site.Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
' indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
' D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
' with specified criteria.
I
Page 1 of 7
I
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing I
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. ,
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant,mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). I
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards I
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the, most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding. '
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS '
A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
Page 2 of 7 ,
S
ISECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-
resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
1 B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in"Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
I
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
IA. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections.Include the following:
1 1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
I 3. Name,address,and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
I 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
I10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
I the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
IB. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections
specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1 1. Name,address,and telephone number of representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
I
requirements and,if not,what corrective action was taken.
4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
1 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
1 certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
I1.6Q UALITY ASSURANCE
I A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
I
Page 3 of 7
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar ,
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units. ,
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
111
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to current ASTM standards and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections;
and,where required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities.
H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer
who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material,design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following: I
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 1
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups do not
reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Page 4 of 7
1 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
' J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
' Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Specification Sections.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
' 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor and the
' Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
' writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
' testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report,in duplicate,of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
' Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
Page 5 of 7
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to
observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of
substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the
Work, and submittal of written reports.
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not releases, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. '
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work. ,
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting.Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and
-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests,inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. ,
1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS '
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of
Owner.Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control
1
Page 6 of 7
1
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform
the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a fmal report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies?
' 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
111
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
' 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur.Provide access to test and
inspection log for Architect's, Owner's and others of reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
' Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas
and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
' C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION
I
Page 7 of 7
1
1 SECTION 0142 00 REFERENCES
I
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES
IGENERAL
SCOPE
IThis Section includes reference standards.
IDESIGNATION OF ASSOCIATIONS,INSTITUTIONS,SOCIETIES AND STANDARDS
Whenever in these Specifications reference is made to Associations,Institutions,Societies or Standards,they
will be designated as follows:
AA Aluminum Association
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
I
AAN American Association of Nurserymen
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
ADA American Disability Act
I
AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association
AFI Air Filter Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association
'
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
I
AISI
AMCA American Iron and Steel Institute
Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
I
APWA American Public Works Association Standard Specification,OSSC
(ODOT/APWA)
AREA American Railway Engineering Association
I
ARI
ASA Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
American Standards Association
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
' ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engi-
neers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
I
AWPA
AWS American Wood Preservers Association
American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BLIS Bureau of Labor and Industries Standards
BLM Bureau of Land Management
CDBG Community Development Block Grant
CEMA Conveyor Equipment Manufacturer's Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
COE Corps of Engineers
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
DEQ Department of Environmental Quality
I
DFPA
DSL Division for Product Approval of American Plywood Association
Division of State Lands
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
IFHWA Federal Highway Administration
IPage 1 of 2
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES 111
FM Factory Mutual I
FmHA Farmer's Home Administration(Rural Development)
FS Federal Standards
IBC International Building Code
IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
I
IFC International Fire Code
IRI Industrial Risk Insurance
ISA Instrument Society of America
I
ISO Insurance Service Office
ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers
JIC Joint Industry Conferences of Hydraulic Manufacturers
MUTCD Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices I NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEC National Electrical Code
NESC National Electric Safety Code
I
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NLMA National Lumber Manufacturer's Association
OAR Oregon Administrative Rules
I
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
OCD Oregon Community Development
ODOT Oregon Department of Transportation
ORS Oregon Revised Statutes
I
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSHD ODOT,Oregon State Highway Division Standards(OSSC)
OSSC Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction(ODOT/APWA) I PCA Portland Cement Association
RD Rural Development(USDA)
RUS Rural Utilities Service(USDA)
SHPO State Historic Preservation Office I SMACA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,Inc.
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
UBC Uniform Building Code
I
UFC Uniform Fire Code
UL Underwriter's Laboratories,Inc.
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
USBM United States Bureau of Mines
II
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
Wherever specific standard numbers are indicated,i.e.,ASTM C-150,it shall be understood to mean the latest
I
revision thereof.
PRODUCTS
None
I
EXECUTION
None i
END OF SECTION
I
I
Page 2 of 2
111
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
I
SECTION 01 50 00 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
t
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
1.2 USE CHARGES
' A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Owner's Representatives, Architect,
' testing agencies,and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Provide connections and extensions of
services as required for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Provide connections and extensions of services
as required for construction operations.
i
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
' A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
' B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,whichever is more stringent.
C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities
having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire
prevention program.
1.4Q UALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service.Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
1
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-
link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-
inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and
bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES '
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. '
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and
Construction Manager and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate
Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections.Keep office clean and orderly.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3 EQUIPMENT ,
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location
and application. '
1
Page 2 of 7 1
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
' A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
' B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
' A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
' interrupted,if necessary,to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
' C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
' D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number,location,operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
' E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed
construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed
construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation
' requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain
equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.
H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
' size,capacity,and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Install electric power service as indicated.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations,observations, inspections,and traffic conditions.
' Page 3 of 7
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements 1
without operating entire system.
J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by
all construction personnel.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
2. At each telephone,post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
e. Architect's office.
f. Engineers'offices.
g. Owner's office.
I
h. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office. I
K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office
adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain
electronic communications.
1. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing,
photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.
2. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall.
3. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware,
phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION '
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction ,
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated. '
Page 4 of 7 '
1
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking.Reapply treatment as
required to minimize dust.
C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved
areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary
' roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and
paved areas,within construction limits indicated,as necessary for construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
' paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."
' 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading,proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until
' immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course
pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt
Paving."
' D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
' 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs,pavement,and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
E. Parking:parking areas for construction personnel.
F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.Maintain Project site, excavations,and construction free of water.
' - 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
' 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated.Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
' 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary,directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
I
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."
Page 5 of 7
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
I
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION '
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities,
and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air,waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with all applicable codes and 1
documentation.
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide '
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip
line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. '
F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,vandalism,theft,
and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 1
H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL 1
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse,limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 1
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1
Page 6 of 7 1
1
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
' C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces,and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77
00 "Closeout Procedures."
I
I
1
I
I
1
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
Page 7 of 7
1
SECTION 01 60 00-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
I
SECTION 01 60 00 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
1
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment,""system,"and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature,which is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
' performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
' product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
t1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
' 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of approval or
rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or
seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 01 60 00-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS I
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable I
product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 I
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
I
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
I
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other I
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for I handling, storing,unpacking,protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
I
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. I 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation,and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 1
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
I
Page 2 of 5
111
1 SECTION 01 60 00-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Iproduct warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
I1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
I 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
Iidentification,ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
I properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
I 3. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
IC. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
I
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
IA. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated,are new at time of installation.
I1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
I
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
I requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
I 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
IB. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
I named product that complies with requirements.Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
I Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
3. Products:
I
IPage 3 of 5
SECTION 01 60 00-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers '
and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered unless otherwise indicated.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers: '
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.
5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes,profiles,dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", '
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements: I
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
I
Page 4 of 5 I
ISECTION 01 60 00-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
111 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
I durability,visual effect,and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration.Identify product or
I fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.
I 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and that proposed
product meets the conditions for consideration outlined above.
IC. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation
for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify
1 Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution
within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
IPART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 01 60 00
I
I
I
IPage 5 of 5
1 SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION
I
SECTION 01 73 00 -EXECUTION
IGENERAL
1 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
1 Work including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Construction layout.
I
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
I
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
1 8. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
Il. Section 01 10 00"Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
1 levels,and final cleaning.
I1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit certificate certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply
with requirements.
I
B. Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous
materials, for hazardous waste disposal
IC. Final Property Survey: Submit requested number of copies showing the Work performed and
record survey data.
I
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
IA. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice AINIW
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
I1. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
I
Page 1 of 8
I
SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety.
2. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual 1
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS ,
2.1 MATERIALS I
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed 1
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used,use materials that,when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials. I
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning Sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Page 2 of 8
I
I I SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
IA. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to the local utility, that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
Ijurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
I measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
I Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
Idiagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
I of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 01 31 00"Project Management and Coordination."
1 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
I A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered,notify Architect promptly.
IB. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
I construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
I required dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Architect and the Owner's Representative when deviations from required lines
and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
Iby authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement,utility slopes,and rim and invert elevations.
' D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
I
Page 3 of 8
I
SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. ,
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and 1
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by the Architect and Owner.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of number of permanent benchmarks on
Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points as necessary. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record I
Documents.
C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and Sitework.
D. Final Property Survey: Engage a surveying company to prepare a final property survey showing 1
significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed as
required for principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as
shown on the survey.
1. Recording: At Substantial Completion,have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." I
3.5 INSTALLATION
I
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes,ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
Page4of8
I
SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
' F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
' factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
' other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement,including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect.Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
111 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time,and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
I
Page 5 of 8
SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION I
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free I
passage to adjoining areas.
F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
I
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply I
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
I
G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as111
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections,where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching
and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
I
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, I mortar, oils,putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING I
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. I
I
Page 6 of 8
I
SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally,according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
1 C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
' 1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
rD. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
1 the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
' A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
' without binding.
Page 7 of 8
I
SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 111
"Quality
Requirements"
3.9
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
1
1
1
1
I
I
i
1
1
END OF SECTION
I
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
I
SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to,the following:
' 1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
111
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications,and record Product Data.
1
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:For cleaning agents.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
SC. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
g
C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
i
Page 1 of 5
1
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES I
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected(Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days ,
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits,operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation,damage or settlement surveys,property surveys,and similar
final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. ,
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's
signature for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. I
6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
3. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
4. Complete final cleaning requirements,including touchup painting.
5. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
Page 2 of 5
I
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
111
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for fmal completion.
' 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment
Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest-control fmal inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment,and systems.
' B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will
' notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be
issued.
1. Reinspection:Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary,areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
' 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors,equipment, and building systems.
3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. MS Excel electronic file.Architect will return annotated copy.
b. PDF electronic file.Architect will return annotated copy.
1
1
Page 3 of 5
1
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 2-PRODUCTS '
2.1 MATERIALS 1
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous I
to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING ,
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification '
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, 1
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove debris.
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition. I
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
Page 4 of 5
I
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
' identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or dlonvit
4. e burned-outreuce bo
gelbs, buy.
Replaclbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
1
1
I
i
Page 5 of 5
1
ISECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
I
SECTION 01 78 23 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 -GENERAL
a1.1 SUMMARY
I A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals,including the following:
I 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
I 4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
I1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
I Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
I 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
Iand field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
l
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory.
Ib. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Two paper copies and three Disks with all data included. Include a complete operation
Iand maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves..
C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion.
I
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS '
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY,OPERATION,AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS '
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance
data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired
information.
B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
C. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual. I
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment,and components of one system into a single binder.
F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names
used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and
subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files,then create composite manual, so
that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a
readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on
opening file.
I
Page 2 of 7
111
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
' G. Manuals,Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy,bound and labeled volumes.
' 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose leaf binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear
plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to
I
hold folded oversize sheets.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
I
contents,and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate
volume number for multiple-volume sets.
I
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
I
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
I4. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
I
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
I
and drawing locations.
I
2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
I1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
I
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem,piece of equipment,and component:
I
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
I 3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
I
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem,or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
1
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
I
Page 3 of 7
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA I
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: I
1. Instructions on stopping. I 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
I
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
I
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
I
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
I
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs. I
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams. mi;
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract I Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
I
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
I
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: I
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures. I
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
I
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
I
Page 4 of 7
111
ISECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
IE. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1 A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds,as described below.
IB. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
I telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
IC. Product Information: Include the following,as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
1 3. Color,pattern,and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
ID. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
I
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
Irelated services.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions
I
that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
I source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts,and warranty and bond information,as described below.
I B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
I
Page 5 of 7
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, 1
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation ,
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal,replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal,repair,and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with '
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
1
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures ,
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
1
I
Page 6 of 7
111
1 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
Inot part of a system.
D. Manufacturers'Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers'standard printed data, include only
I sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or
component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data
applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
I
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
I flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
I 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
F. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
IEND OF SECTION O1 78 23
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
Page 7of7
1
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
1
SECTION 054000-COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1
specification Sections,apply to this Section
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing.
2. Interior load-bearing wall framing.
3. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
1 4. Floor joist framing.
5. Roof trusses.
1 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1 1. Design Loads: As indicated. On the drawings.
2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following:
1 a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall
height.
b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall
1 height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft..
c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/36 of the wall
height.
1 d. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/480 for live loads and 1/360 for total
loads of the span.
e. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacing's, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details,including mechanical fasteners.
1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
1 analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Qualification data.
E. Product test reports.
F. Research/evaluation reports.
1
1 Page 1 of 7
1
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating
steel sheet complies with requirements.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding
Code--Sheet Steel."
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing iden-
tical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing-General Provisions."
1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Truss Design."
2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Header Design."
E. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One
and Two Family Dwellings." '
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1. Grade: ST33H(ST230H)] ST50H(ST340H)As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: Per Structural Documents. or equivalent. I
2.2 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING '
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)] or per project drawings
[0.0538 inch(1.37 mm)] [0.0677 inch(1.72 mm)] [0.0966 inch(2.45 mm)].
2. Section Properties: Per project drawings.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track,of web depths indicated,unpunched,
with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.
C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header
beams, of web depths indicated,punched,with stiffened flanges,and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Per Structural Documents.
2. Flange Width: Per Structural Documents.
3. Section Properties: Per drawings.
2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges,and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Per structural drawings.
2. Flange Width: Per structural drawings.
Page 2 of 7 '
I
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track,of web depths indicated,unpunched,
' with unstiffened flanges,and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward
and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attach-
ment to stud web.
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,
with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads.
E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched,with unstiffened flanges.
2.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING
A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists,of web depths indicated,unpunched,
' with stiffened flanges,and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: per structural drawings.
2. Flange Width: per structural drawings.
' 3. Section Properties: per structural drawings
B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched,with unstiffened flanges,and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel joists.
' 2. Flange Width: Per structural drawings.
' 2.5 ROOF TRUSSES
A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard per structural drawings.
' 2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
' ASTM A 123/A 123M.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-
steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class C.
' D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified inde-
pendent testing agency.
I I F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping
steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing,manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
1
' Page 3 of 7
1
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
i
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035 ASTM A 780.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.
Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for
placement and hydration.
C. Shims: Load bearing,high-density multimonomer plastic,nonleaching.
D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch(6.4 mm)thick, selected from manufactur-
er's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and
the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface
on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. I
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Foinied Steel Fram-
ing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent re-
quirements are indicated. 1
B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths.
D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in inten-
sity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undis-
turbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connec-
tions to framing are secured.
E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Inde-
pendently frame both sides of joints.
F. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior
framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a max-
imum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960) and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and se-
curely anchor at corners and ends,and at spacings as follows:
1. Anchor Spacing: Per structural drawings.
Page4of7
I
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch(3 mm)be-
tween the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top
and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: Per structural drawings.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar configurations.
D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs
cannot be aligned,continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously rein-
force track to transfer loads.
F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls,including masonry walls,to supporting struc-
ture as indicated.
G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as
indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to sup-
' porting studs,complete with clip-angle connectors,web stiffeners, or gusset plates.
1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated
on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.
2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to
jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall
studs.
H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fix-
tures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring at-
tachment to framing.
I1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's writ-
ten recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load re-
sulting from item supported.
I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated on Drawings. Fasten at each stud
intersection.
1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of
punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing
members up to 6 inches(150 mm)deep.
2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to rein-
forced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing
and anchor to structure.
K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffen-
ers, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable
wall-framing system.
3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
' supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track,unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as
follows:
1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on drawings.
' Page 5 of 7
1
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
1
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.
2. Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing infill studs and anchor to primary building
structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Drawings but not more
than 48 inches(1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12
inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet
straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and
thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to
stud webs or flanges.
a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Drawings.
2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of
punched studs.
3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip an-
gles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable cur- 1
tain-wall-framing system.
3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION I
A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to
supporting structure at corners, ends,and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,
brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38
mm).
2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips,joist hangers,
steel clip angles,or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Space joists not more than 2 inches(51 mm) from abutting walls,and as follows:
1. Joist Spacing: As indicated.
D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or
another combination of connected joists if indicated.
E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located
directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as in-
dicated on Drawings.
1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.
F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as
follows:
1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist
webs.
1
Page 6 of 7
111
I
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
I
2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
I and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bot-
tom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.
G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.
I H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces,
clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners,to provide a complete
and stable joist-framing assembly.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perfouii
I field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified re-
quirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine com-
pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
IA. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and in-
stalled cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
I B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time
of.Substantial Completion.
I
IEND OF SECTION 054000
I
I
I
I
I
IPage 7 of 7
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following metal fabrications:
1. Steel ladders.
2. Pipe bollards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
plans,elevations, sections,and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show an-
chorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation
under other Sections.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those in-
dicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding
' Code--Steel,"AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," and AWS D1.3 "Structural
Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal
fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded meas-
urements on fmal shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,pro-
vide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness,and freedom from surface blem-
ishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names,
or roughness.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36(ASTM A 36M).
C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786(ASTM A 786M).
D. Steel Tubing: Product type(manufacturing method)and as follows:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,standard weight(schedule 40),unless otherwise indicated,or another
weight required by structural loads.
' 1. Black finish,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
F. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48,Class 30.
1
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
G. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47,Grade 32510 .
H. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below,fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials capable of sustaining,without failure,the load imposed within a safety factor of
4,as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,conducted by a qualified independent testing agen-
cy.
I. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to
be welded.
J. Stainless steel: Stainless steel shall be gauges as indicated,Type 304,with#3 finish.
2.2 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing,lead-and chromate-free,universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion,compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized
steel,with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with
DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.3 FASTENERS '
A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633,Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodepos-
ited zinc coating,for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type,
grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts,ASTM A 307,Grade A(ASTM F 568,Property
Class 4.6),with hex nuts.
C. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3 (ANSI B18.6.7M).
D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 (ANSI B18.2.3.8M). ,
E. Wood Screws: Flat head,carbon steel,ANSI B18.6.1.
F. Plain Washers: Round,carbon steel,ANSI B18.22.1 (ANSI B18.22M).
G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type,carbon steel,ANSI B18.21.1.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain,without failure,a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per111
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
I. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588,tumble-wing type,class and style as required.
2.4 GROUT
I
A. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for in-
terior
and exterior applications.
2.5 CONCRETE FILL
1
Page 2 of 4 u
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section"Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight,air-entrained,ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi(20 MPa),unless higher strengths are indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION,GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size,thickness,and shapes indicated but not less than
that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or
accepted on shop drawings,using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials
indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch(1 mm),unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
E. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS Recommendations.
1. At exposed connections,fmish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing,and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated;coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
H. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of jointed pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
I. Cut,reinforce,drill,and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive fmish hardware,screws,and
similar items.
2.7 STEEL LADDERS
A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown,with dimensions,spacings,details,and an-
chorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. Comply with Local Building
Code revisions and Local Safety requirements.
B. Siderails: Continuous,steel, 1/2"by 2-1/2" (12mm by 64 mm)flat bars,with eased edges, spaced
18 inches(460 mm)apart.
C. Bar Rungs: 3/4 inch(19 mm)diameter steel bars,spaced 12 inches(300 mm)o.c.
D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails,plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 60 inches
(1500 mm)o.c.with welded or bolted steel brackets.
1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of lad-
der rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 5 inches(127 mm).
I
Page 3 of 4
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
2.8 PIPE BOLLARDS I
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. 1
PART 3 -EXECUTION I
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete ma-
sonry or similar construction.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not
to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Do
not weld,cut,or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabri-
cation and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion re-
sistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing,and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
3.2 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Anchor bollards in concrete as detailed on plans.
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete,mounding top surface.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING '
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,bolted connections,and abraded
areas of shop paint,and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to com-
ply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a 2.0-mil(0.05-mm)minimum dry film thickness.
B. For galvanized surfaces,clean welds,bolted connections,and abraded areas,and apply galvaniz-
ing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 1
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
Page 4 of 4 I
SECTION 06 11 20 FRAMING,SHEATHING and SIDING
1 SECTION 06 11 20 FRAMING, SHEATHING and SIDING
IPART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
IA. Section Includes:
1. Structural wall and roof framing.
I 2. Wall and roof sheathing
3. Sill gaskets and flashings
4. Preservative treatment of wood.
5. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing
I6. Framing with dimension lumber.
7. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
8. Wood blocking,cants,and nailers.
I 9. Wood furring.
10. Wood sleepers.
11. Plywood backing panels.
IPART 2-PRODUCTS
I2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide structural wood materials with grade stamps of WCLIB or WWPA, and as modified
Iherein.
1. All lumber shall be free of noticeable warp or twist,with less than 5%showing"very light"
warp,twist,bow, cup or crook per Rule 16.
1 2. Seal end grain of material prior to delivery to Project Site.
I B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19
percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
I2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
I . A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA Ul; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not
in contact with the ground,and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
Iarsenic or chromium.Do not use inorganic boron(SBX)for sill plates.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
Imaterial that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
IBoard of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
I
IPage 1 of 4
SECTION 06 11 20 FRAMING,SHEATHING and SIDING
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or
unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
E. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
F. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Framing for raised platforms.
2. Concealed blocking.
3. Roof framing and blocking.
4. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in
connection with roofing.
5. Plywood backing panels.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species. I
1. Hem-fir(north);NLGA.
2. Southern pine; SPIB.
3. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
4. Mixed southern pine; SPIE.
5. Spruce-pine-fir;NLGA.
6. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
7. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
8. Douglas fir-larch(north);NLGA.
9. Spruce-pine-fir(south);NeLMA,WCLIB,or WWPA.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER I
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
7. Utility shelving.
i
Page 2 of 4 I
ISECTION 06 11 20 FRAMING,SHEATHING and SIDING
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any
species.
1 C. For utility shelving, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of eastern
white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Standard or No. 3 Common
' grade;NeLMA,NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1 1. Mixed southern pine,No.2 grade; SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods,No. 2 Common grade;NELMA.
3. Northern species,No. 2 Common grade;NLGA.
I4. Western woods,Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
I2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1,Exterior,AC, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated,
I not less than 112-inchnominal thickness.
1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
I
2.6 FASTENERS
IA. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
I 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity,provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
IB. Power-Driven Fasteners:NES NER-272.
C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw
Imanufacturer for material being fastened.
IPART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
IC. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction,"unless otherwise indicated.
I
IPage 3 of 4
SECTION 06 11 20 FRAMING,SHEATHING and SIDING
D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities I
requiring backing panels.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. I
F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
1
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite I
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION
I
1
I
I
I
1
1
I
Page 4 of 4
I
SECTION 07 21 00 -THERMAL INSULATION
PART GENERAL ENERAL
SECTION 07 21 00-THERMAL INSULATION
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concealed building insulation in board form.
2. Building insulation in batt form
3. Sound Attenuation Insulation
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
' A. Product test reports.
B. Research reports.
PART 2-PRODUCTS -
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insulation products of one of
the following:
1. Polystyrene Board Insulation
a. The Dow Chemical Company Div.
b. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp.
c. John Manville
d. CertainTeed
e. Or approved substitution
2. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
' a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Knauf Fiber Glass.
c. Schuller: Building Insulations Div.
' d. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp.
e. John Manville
f. Or approved substitution
1
1
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 07 21 00-THERMAL INSULATION
I
3. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation
a. FM Approved,meets FM Standards 4470/4450./
1) CAN/ULC S704,Type II(2),Class 1 faced w/glass fiber mat membrane
facer both sides, Grade 2, 138 kPa(20 psi)minimum compressive strength.
b. Meets ASTM C1289,Type II, Class 1, Grade 2.
c. Thickness,Taper and R value as scheduled on drawings
d. Maximum Board Size
e. Mechanically Attached Applications(Steel,Wood decks) -up to 4 feet by 8 feet
f. Accepted Manufacturers(must be provided by roof membrane manufacturer where I
so offered):
1) GAF
2) Johns Manville
3) Atlas Energy Products
4) RMax
5) Hunter
6) Apache Products
7) CertainTeed
8) Or approved substitution
4. Glass-Fiber Sound Attenuation Batts, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Dow Chemical Co.
2) Owens Corning Fiberglass Corp
3) US Gypsum Co.
4) Mansville Corp.
5) Certainteed
5. Substitutions:Under provisions of Section 012500
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 5,per ASTM E 84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029,Type II, closed cell,with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,respectively,per ASTM E 84.
B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles,and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer. ,
C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier
materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without
damaging insulation and substrates.
I
i
Page 2 of 4
ISECTION 07 21 00-THERMAL INSULATION
II
I 2.3 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards listed in Section 01420..
I 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated,selected from manufacturer's stand-
ard thickness,widths,and lengths.
2. See contract drawings for minimum insulation thickness and/or"R"values required.
IB. EXTERIOR WALL FURRING: Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insu-
lation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins
I to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I(blankets without membrane facing), CAN/ULC-S702-
97,Type 1 for steel frame construction.
1. Thermal Resistance to ASTM C518 with R-Valve per drawings.
II
C. INTERIOR WALLS:
I 1. Glass fiber Sound Attenuation Insulation complying with ASTM E413 for maximum
STC rating
I 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation or
mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding insulation,
I anchors, or substrates.
B. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: See Division 7—Vapor Barriers for criteria
C. Wire Fasteners—Rigid, straight galvanized wire fasteners to hold insulation from slumping or
Icoming into contact with back up walls in furred cavities.
IPART 3 -EXECUTION
I3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
Iapplications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain,or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation.Remove projections that interfere with placement.
ID. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,
and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or
111 required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
I
iPage 3 of 4
SECTION 07 21 00-THERMAL INSULATION
3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION I
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic
spaces at vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as
follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is
installed over it. I
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required
to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum
volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..
2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I
I
1
END OF SECTION 07 21 00
I
Page 4 of 4 i
i
I
SECTION 07 25 00-WEATHER BARRIERS
I
111 SECTION 07 25 00 -WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 -GENERAL '
I 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building paper.
I 2. Building wrap.
3. Self-Adhesive membrane
1) The work of this Section includes the supply and installation of a self-adhesive air
I barrier membrane to direct moisture to the exterior and prevent moisture entry into
the building envelope at appurtenances.
2) Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, or whether shown on the
I drawings or not,provide the Air Barrier membrane at the following locations:
a) Around all exterior wall penetrations such as windows, louvers,doors, access
panels, and similar framed openings
I b) At hose bibbs and similar housings
c) Below all cap flashings not otherwise provided with a roofing membrane.
d) At masonry columns under concrete caps
1
e) Membrane at roof control joints at steel deck level
4. Flexible Flashing
I 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For building wrap,include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing
I according to referenced standards.
B. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
C. Samples: Weather Barrier Membrane,minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications
I 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of DuPont TM Tyvek®weather barrier
assemblies under similar conditions.
2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's installation
I
and recommendations.
3. Source Limitations: Provide building wrap and accessory materials produced by single
II
manufacturer.
I
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing products similar to those in-
dicated for this Project and that has a record of successful in-service performance and conform
to product qualifications listed in paragraph 1.4.D below.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution-control regulatory
agency having jurisdiction in the Project locale regarding volatile organic compounds(VOC)
and use of hydrocarbon solvents.
I1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent(except
with written recommendation of manufacturer)under any of the following conditions:
I
IPage 1 of 5
SECTION 07 25 00-WEATHER BARRIERS I
1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F for over a 24 hour period. ,
2. Substrate surfaces have cured for less than one month.
3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F are predicted for a period of 24 hours.
4. Earlier than 24 hours after surfaces became wet.
5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F.
6. Windy condition such that repellent may be blown to vegetation or substrates not
intended.
7. Surface or ambient temperature 100 degrees or above.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer's original,unopened,
undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation
of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly.
B. Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of
weather barrier assembly installation. ,
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit to the Architect a written warranty, executed by the Applicator and water re-
pellent manufacturer covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that
fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in
addition to,and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the contractor un-
der the contract documents.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS '
2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Building Wrap: Fortiflash Water-resistive barrier and Fortiflash Flashing Systems. System
submitted shall be fully compatible with all other materials anticipated to be installed for a
cohesive water resistive barrier regardless of the finish materials scheduled.
B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. Provide the following:
a. DuPont Tyvek Tape
C. Self-Adhesive Membrane
1. MATERIALS
a. Membrane: Bakor Blueskin SA self-adhesive membrane.
1) Primer: Bakor Blueskin Primer.
2) Air Barrier Sealant: Bakor Blueskin Sealant
3) Thermoplastic Rubber Sealant: Bakor Pro-Seal Sealant.
b. Substrate Cleaner: Mineral Spirits or Xylol.
2. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT/MANUFACTURER
a. Bakor Inc.Basis of design products as listed above.
1) Acceptable alternates to the above using equivalent products:
a) Soprema: Saproseal Stick and related products
b) W.R. Grace&Co.: Perm-A-Barrier System 4000
c) Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Ltd.: CCW-701
Page 2 of 5
111
ISECTION 07 25 00-WEATHER BARRIERS
2) Use only compatible products guaranteed by the membrane manufacturer.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
I A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
rubberized-asphalt compound,bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or
spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch(0.8 nim) .
1 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following
1. DuPontTM F1exWrapTM: Flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and
penetrations.
I
2. DuPontTM StraightFlashTM: Straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows
Iand doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc.
3. DuPontTM Thru-Wall Surface Adhered Membrane with Integrated Drip Edge: Thru-Wall
I flashing membrane materials for flashing at changes in direction or elevation(shelf
angles, foundations, etc.) and at transitions between different assembly materials.
4. Preformed Inside and Outside Corners and End Dams as distributed by DuPont:
I Preformed three-dimensional shapes to complete the flashing system used in conjunction
with DuPontTM Thru-Wall Flashing.
I B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for
substrate.
I a. 3M High Strength 90
b. Denso Butyl Spray
c. SIA 655
l d. Permagrip 105
e. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer
I C. Nails and Staples:
1. ASTM F 1667.
2. DuPontTM Tyvek®Wrap Cap Screws,: 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch
I diameter plastic cap fasteners.
D. Sealant
1. Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain
Iwatertight conditions.
E. Adhesives:
11. Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.
2. Products:
I
a. Liquid Nails®LN-109
b. Denso Butyl Liquid
c. 3M High Strength 90
I d. SIA 655
e. Adhesives recommend by the weather barrier manufacturer.
1
I
Page 3 of 5
SECTION 07 25 00-WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to
framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-or
control joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 6-inch overlap unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Install(1)layer Building Wrap directly over sheathing. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
a. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
b. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
4. In conjunction with STUCCO SYSTEM or STONE MASONRY:.
a. Install(1)layer Building Paper over Building Wrap: Apply horizontally with a 2-
inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or
roofing nails. i
3.2 SELF ADHERED MEMBRANE INSULATION
A. PRIMING
1. All surfaces to receive Blueskin SA must be primed with Blueskin Primer, applied by
lambs wool roller,brush,or spray equipment at the rate of 100-300 sq.ft./gallon
(depending on porosity and texture of surface)and allowed to dry 30 minutes before ,
Blueskin SA is applied.
2. Ensure that all primed surfaces receive Blueskin SA in the same day or re-priming will be
required
B. SELF-ADHESIVE MEMBRANE APPLICATION
1. Apply membrane to fully bond to a prepared substrate according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Membrane to be overlapped a minimum of 2"on end and side laps in shingle fashion.Do
not remove overlap covering strip until membrane is ready for overlap seam.
3. Position membrane for alignment with protective film in place.Roll back, remove
protective film and press firmly into place.When membrane is entirely in place,roll
membrane including seams with a counter top roller to ensure full contact
a. Where a horizontally-applied membrane abuts a vertical surface, extend membrane
upwards,min. 6"
4. Cut membrane neatly around ties to form a tight seal. Seal areas around ties and any
projections with application of Blueskin Sealant,Air-Bloc 21, or Air-Bloc 21FR.
5. Seal end of membrane where it meets the substrate.
6. Use Air-Bloc 21, or Air-Bloc 21FR, or Blueskin Sealant. as the sealant.Apply sealant as
the work progresses,but not later than the end of each work day.
C. PROTECTION f
1. Provide temporary opaque covering should membrane be left exposed for more than 1.5
months.
2. Instruct subsequent trades on protection required to prevent damage to the membrane.
D. CLEAN-UP
1
Page 4 of 5
111
ISECTION 07 25 00-WEATHER BARRIERS
III1. On completion, examine all surfaces, correct any deficiencies, and remove all materials,
equipment, debris, and tools.
I 3.3 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
I 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
I 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure
that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
I
I
I
I
iEND OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
•
1
I
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 07 26 00-VAPOR BARRIER
SECTION 07 26 00 -VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polyethylene vapor retarders.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation" for vapor retarders integral with insulation
' products.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including all accessories to create an air tight bather
B. Manufacturer Installation Procedures: Provide installation guide or product specifications
describing manufacturer recommended installation procedures.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS
A. MANUFACTURERS
1. The following manufacturers are the basis of design.
a. Certainteed MemBrain
b. Griffolyn Type-90 VCI
c. No substitutions allowed
B. Sheet vapor/air barrier: 6 mil (0.2 mm)thick, with a maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perms
(2.3 ng/s.m2.Pa)polyethylene sheets, conforming to CAN/CGSB-51.34.
C. Joint sealing tape: type recommended by vapor bather manufacturer, 50 mm (2") wide for lap
joints and perimeter seals.
D. Sealant: to CGSB-19-GP-21M.
E. Staples: minimum 6 mm(1/4") leg.
F. Adhesive: compatible with steel studs and vapor barrier.
G. Molded box vapor barrier: factory-molded polyethylene box for use with recessed electric
switch and outlet device boxes.
1
' Page 1 of 2
SECTION 07 26 00-VAPOR BARRIER
H. Accessories
1. Seam Tape: High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum
width 4 inches.
2. As recommended by manufacturer
PART 3 -EXECUTION '
3.1 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING '
A. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor
retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended
by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, 111
including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and ,
sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarders.
1. Exterior Surface Openings
a. Cut sheet air/vapor barrier to form openings. Extend air/vapor barriers to the
perimeter of door and window frames. Lap and seal to frames.
2. Electrical Boxes
b. Seal electrical switch and outlet device boxes that penetrate air/vapor barrier by
Installing molded box vapor barrier or wrap boxes with polyethylene film sheet
providing minimum 300 mm(12")perimeter lap flange.
c. Apply sealant to seal edges of flange to main air/vapor barrier and seal wiring
penetrations through box cover.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
i
1
END OF SECTION 072600
1
1
Page 2 of 2 ,
SECTION—07 62 00-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
' GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:
1. Copings, flashing and counter flashings, gutters and downspouts, fabricated sheet metal
items, as indicated in Schedule
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement,and exposure to weather without failing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials profile,jointing pattern,jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings,terminations and installation details.
B. Product Data: Provide data on prefabricated components.
C. Samples: Submit two samples in minimum 8 in.by 8 in. sizes illustrating typical material and
finish and metal finish color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing
' and trim work similar in material,design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years experience.
C. Pre-construction conference: Coordinate with roofing and other related work; convene confer-
ence minimum one week before starting work.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Gutter and Downspout Components: Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain
discharge.
' 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Stack material to prevent twisting,bending and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal
sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of
each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance,durability of Work, and protection of
materials and finishes.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526,G 90(ASTM A 526M,Z 275),commer-
cial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90(ASTM A 527M,Z 275),lock-forming quality,not less than
24 gauge(0.0396 in., 1.0 mm)unless noted otherwise. Shop pre-coated with PVDF(polyvinyl-
idene fluoride)Kynar 500 fmish; color as scheduled.
B. Lead: ASTM B749,min 2.5 lbs,or as indicated.
2.2 SELF ADHERING MEMEBRANE,FLEXIBLE FLASHING
A. Refer to Section 072500-Weather Barriers.
' Page 1 of 4
SECTION—07 62 00-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES '
A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50,used with rosin flux.
B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by
sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. Provide
with neoprene washers.
C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic,nominally free of sulfur and con-
taining no asbestos fibers,compounded for 15-mil(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Di-
vision 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
E. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units as required for installation of Work,matching or compatible with material being installed;
noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
F. Primer : Zinc molybdate.
G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586,Type I.
2.4 FABRICATION,GENERAL
A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with rec-
ommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to the design, di-
mensions, metal,and other characteristics of the item indicated.
B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and re-
sult in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimen-
sions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Form exposed sheet metal work that is without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks
and that is true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams, except where other-
wise indicated. At moving joints,use sealed lapped,bayonet-type or interlocking hooked
seams.
E. Form pieces in maximum 10 foot lengths with no joints allowed within 24 inches(610 mm) of
corner or intersection.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being an-
chored or from compatible,noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.
1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for applica-
tion but never less than two gauges greater in thickness than the metal being secured. I G. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
H. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 24 inch long legs; seam for ridgity, seal seal-
ant.
I. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.
J. Fabricate gutters and downspouts to profile and size specified in Schedule.
K. Fabricate accessories in profile and size to suit gutters and downspouts. I
L. Fabricate splash pans of same type as downspouts according SMACNA.
M. Seal metal joints.
2.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance
requirements,but not less than that listed below for each application and metal.
B. Copings: Fabricate from the following material:
I
Page 2 of 4 '
SECTION—07 62 00-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
1. 24 Gage Galvanized Steel with thickness of: 0.0359 inch(1.0 mm)thick, or as indicated
on drawings.
C. Counter flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. 24 Gage Galvanized Steel with thickness of: 0.0179 inch(0.55 mm)thick,or as indicat-
ed on drawings.
D. Drip edges: Fabricate from the following material:
1. 24 Gage Galvanized Steel with thickness of: 0.0179 inch(0.55 mm)thick, or as indicat-
ed on drawings.
E. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. 24 Gage Galvanized Steel with thickness of: 0.0239 inch(0.7 mm)thick.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed
and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatis-
' factory conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify roof openings,curbs,pipes, sleeves,ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set,and
nailing strips located.
' C. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed,and secure.
3.2 PREPARATION
' A. Install starter and edge strips,and cleats before starting installation.
B. Paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of
15 mils.
' 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated,install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with regu-
latory requirements,performance requirements,manufacturer's installation instructions,and
' SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by
methods indicated,providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where pos-
sible,and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps,joints, and seams
' that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks
and that is true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. In-
stall sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-
resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricat-
ing sheet metal.
C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention
Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.
D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Where
lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficient-
ly weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less
than 1 inch(25 mm)deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints).
' E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered,removing oils and foreign matter.
1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
F. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion,but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
' sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to complete-
ly conceal sealant.
1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
' Page 3 of 4
SECTION—07 62 00-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. ,
H. Separations: Separate metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating con-
cealed surfaces,at locations of contact,with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer.
I. Install reglets to receive counter flashing according to the manufacturer's directions.
J. Counter flashings: Coordinate installation of counter flashings with installation of assemblies to
be protected by counter flashing. Install counter flashings in reglets. Secure in a waterproof
manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant,interlocking fold-
ed seam,or blind rivets,screws with washers and sealant. Lap counter flashing joints a mini-
mum
of 2 inches(50 mm)and bed with sealant. Install 15 lb felts between wood and sheet met-
al.
K. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing
and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces,removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or dete-
rioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work
during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION '
1
1
1
1
Page 4 of 4 '
SECTION 07 71 90 WATER REPELLANTS
SECTION 07 71 90 WATER REPELLANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General Conditions and Division 1
specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections-the following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
' 1. Division 3 Section-Cast-in-Place Concrete for concrete work including sealers and cur-
ing agents.
2. Division 4 Section—Masonry Units
3. Division 7 Section-Joint Sealants for joint fillers and sealants.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of clear water repellent coating to the
following vertical and nontraffic horizontal non-painted exposed surfaces(some conditions do
not occur):
' 1. Stone
2. Brick
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data including manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application in-
structions,recommendations for water repellents for each surface specified,and protection and
cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufac-
turer for applications indicated and comply with requirements.
' C. Certification by water repellent manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regula-
tions controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOC).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who employs only persons trained and
' approved by water repellent manufacturer for installation of manufacturer's products.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing products similar to those in-
dicated for this Project and that has a record of successful in-service performance and conform
' to product qualifications listed in paragraph 1.4.D below.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution-control regulatory
agency having jurisdiction in the Project locale regarding volatile organic compounds(VOC)
and use of hydrocarbon solvents.
D. Product qualifications: Manufacturer must provide independent lab test reports meeting or ex-
ceeding the following performance criteria:
' 1. ASTM E-514"Water Leakage of Masonry."
a. CMU—Percent improvement 99%.
2. ASTM C-140"Concrete Masonry Units,Absorption"
' a. CMU—89%effective in reducing water intrusion.
3. ASTM D-1653"Moisture Vapor Permeability of Organic Coatings".
a. 95%breathablity.
E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Comply with paragraph 1.4.D above.
111
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 07 71 90 WATER REPELLANTS
1
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent(except
with written recommendation of manufacturer)under any of the following conditions:
1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F (4 deg C)for over a 24 hour period.
2. Substrate surfaces have cured for less than one month.
3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C) are predicted for a period of 24 hours.
4. Earlier than 24 hours after surfaces became wet.
5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F (4 deg C).
6. Windy condition such that repellent may be blown to vegetation or substrates not intend-
ed.
7. Surface or ambient temperature 100 degrees or above.
B. Sealer Coordination:
1. Verify compatibility with curing compounds,patching materials,repair mortar,paints,
sealants, etc. to be used on substrate to ensure compatibility with the water repellent.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Section 01785—Warranty Procedural Requirements.
B. Warranty: Submit to the Architect a written warranty, executed by the Applicator and water re-
pellent manufacturer covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that
fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the contractor un-
der the contract documents.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following:
1. Protectosil Aqua-Trete Concentrate or approved substitute
a. 100%active solids Silane Concentrate.
b. 1 coat application. I
c. For concrete, site mix 1:14 with water.
2.2 WATER REPELLENTS
A. VOC-Complying Water Repellents: Products certified by the manufacturer that they comply
with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds.
B. Verify sheen required by architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify condi-
tions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Page 2 of 4
SECTION 07 71 90 WATER REPELLANTS
' 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water re-
' pellents. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's instructions to ensure
that surface is sufficiently dry
B. Masonry and concrete cracks:
' 1. Caulk all cracks from settling with polyurethane caulking(no silicone caulking permit-
ted)and dust with dry silica sand.
C. Protect adjoining work,including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water re-
pellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is the possibil-
ity of the water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. Immediately
clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces,complying with manufacturer's cleaning recom-
mendations.
D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until the sealants for joints adjacent to
surfaces receiving water repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
' 1. Water repellant work may proceed sealant application only if sealant adhesion and com-
patibility have been tested and verified using substrate,water repellant, and sealant mate-
rials identical to those used in the Work.
E. Test Application: Prior to performing water repellent works, including bulk purchase or deliv-
ery of products,prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner accepta-
ble to the Owner to demonstrate the final effect(visual,physical, and chemical)of planned in-
stallation. Proceed with work only after Owner accepts test application or as otherwise directed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment
using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommen-
dations using airless spraying procedure unless otherwise indicated.
B. Manufacturer representative must perform a pre-application inspection of the substrate and be
present at start of application. Apply mock up panel on the structure for architect/Owner ap-
proval and to establish actual coverage rates. This panel will serve as standard for entire pro-
ject.
' C. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces.
3.4 REPAIR/RE-INSTALLATION
A. Work which does not conform to specified requirements shall be corrected and/or replaced as
directed by the Owner at contractor's expense without extension of time.
3.5 FIELDQ UALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Written certification that surface preparation methods and final condition have manufac-
turer's approval and comply with the warranty.
2. Furnish Test Area: Furnish results of test area absorption on each type of substrate. Test
results shall determine application rate.
B. Test Area:
1. Before a sealer application,the following field evaluation will be done. The cost of the
field testing will be the responsibility of the Water Repellent manufacturer.
2. Prepare a minimum of 3' x 3' area to be sprayed with water repellent. The area will be
determined by the Owner. Apply the water repellent as a rate to achieve a flood coat ap-
Page 3 of 4
SECTION 07 71 90 WATER REPELLANTS
plication. If recommended by the manufacturer, apply an additional coat of the water re- '
pellent.
3. After allowing five days for the sample to cure,run a RILEM uptake test on the treated
area.
4. Place one tube on the treated and tube on an untreated area. For masonry substrates place
a tube on the brick or block,head joint and bed joint. Owner must be present for the ap-
plication
of the water repellent and the test.
5. Acceptable minimum results are as stated in the warranty provisions. Coverage rates
used to pass the test section must be used on entire project.
3.6 CLEANING
A. As Work progresses: Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces using materials and
methods as recommended by water repellent manufacturer.
B. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces when no longer needed.
r
I
END OF SECTION
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 07 79 00 JOINT SEALERS
SECTION 07 79 00 JOINT SEALERS
' PART 1 GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
' 1. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
2. Sealant and backing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing and Materials
(ANSI/ASTM):
II. ANSI/ASTM D1056-Flexible Cellular Materials- Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
2. ANSI/ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and
Copolymers(Open-Cell Foam).
' 3. ASTM C790 -Use of Latex Sealing Compounds.
4. ASTM C804 -Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.
5. ASTM C834 -Latex Sealing Compounds.
6. ASTM C920 - Sealants.
B. Federal Specifications(FS):
' 1. FS TT-S-00227- Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type,Multi-Component.
2. FS TT-S-00230- Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component.
3. FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound.
C. Sealing and Waterproofers Institute(SWI):
I
1. Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
' A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
' B. Product Data:
1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
limitations and color availability.
2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
' C. Samples:
1. Submit two samples 1/2 x 2 inches in size illustrating colors selected.
' D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 00 14 00 that
products meet or exceed specified requirements.
I
Page 1 of 6
i
SECTION 07 79 00 JOINT SEALERS
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this ,
Section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in applying work of this Section with
minimum three years documented experience, and approved by sealant manufacturer.
C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. '
D. Obtain elastomeric materials only from manufacturers who will, if required, send a qualified
technical representative to project site for the purpose of advising the installer of proper
procedures and precautions for use of the materials.
E. Installer shall use sealant which installer will guarantee for the installations shown, and shall
request variations from these specified products,if required to meet performance conditions.
1.5 FIELD SAMPLES 1
A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 00 13 00.
B. Construct field sample 6 feet long illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface.
C. Accepted sample may remain as part of Work. '
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS '
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after '
installation.
C. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when '
temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation.
D. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure '
and development of high early bond strength.
E. Where ever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric
sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's recommended
installation temperature range so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and
bond stress at subsequent low temperature. '
I
Page 2 of 6
ISECTION 07 79 00 JOINT SEALERS
I1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
IA. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00
B. Coordinate work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.
IC. Pre-Installation Meeting:
P1. At the Contractor's direction,the installer, sealant manufacturer's technical representative,
and other trades involved in coordination with sealant work meet with the Contractor at
the project site to review the procedures and time schedule proposed or installation of
sealants in coordination with other work.
2. Review each major sealant application required on the project.
D. The installer must examine the joint surfaces,backing,and anchorage, and the conditions under
I which the sealant work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the sealants.
I E. Do not proceed with the sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the installer. Commencing with installation of sealant materials
constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions.
I
1.8 WARRANTY
IA. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 00 17 00.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight
t
and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion,or do not cure.
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
IA. Silicone Sealant: Spectrum 1 as manufactured by Tremco.
IB. Polyurethane Sealant:Dymonic 100 as manufactured by Tremco.
C. Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: FS TT-S-00227, ASTM C920, Class A, Type 1 - self-
1 leveling, multi- component color as selected; THC 900 by Tremco or Sonolastic SL1 by
Sonneborn.
I
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
I
Page 3 of 6
SECTION 07 79 00 JOINT SEALERS
C. Joint Backing: ANSUASTM D1056 or D1565 round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; ,
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; use type as recommended by joint sealant
manufacturer. '
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application. '
PART 3 EXECUTION i
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are
as shown on Drawings and recommended by manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces and substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION I
A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. I
D. For elastomeric sealants, do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint surfaces which
have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other treatment or
coating unless a laboratory test for durability (adhesion), has successfully demonstrated that
sealant bond is not impaired by coating or treatment. If laboratory test has not been performed
or shows bond interference, remove coating treatment from joint surfaces before installing
sealant.
E. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity unless sealant
manufacturer's printed instructions indicated that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond
and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with diluted ammonia
solution,rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation.
F. Roughen joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar nonporous materials where sealant
manufacturer's data indicated lower bond strength than for porous surfaces. Rub with fine
abrasive to produce a dull sheen.
G. Perform preparation in accordance with:
1. ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants.
2. ASTM C790 for latex base sealants
H. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Page 4 of 6
1
SECTION 07 79 00 JOINT SEALERS
1 A. Perform installation in accordance with Contract Documents and following:
I 1. ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants.
2. ASTM C790 for latex base sealants.
IB. Install sealant in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions.
C. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
ID. Install joint backing to achieve neck dimension no greater than 1/3 joint width.
E. Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
IDo not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
F. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
IG. Install sealant backup rod for elastomeric sealants except where shown to be omitted or
recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for the application shown.
I1. Open cell: Use in vertical and horizontal traffic non-traffic bearing joints.
2. Closed cell: Use in all horizontal traffic bearing.joints.
IH. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied with these temperature ranges
II. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter,ridges, and sags.
J. Employ only proven installation techniques which will ensure that sealants will be deposited
I in uniform continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint
bond surfaces equally on opposite sides.
I 1. Except as otherwise indicated, tool sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly
below adjoining surfaces.
2. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint
Ito form a slight cove so that joints will not trap moisture and dirt.
K. Tool joints concave.
1 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
I
A. Clean work under provisions set forth for this project.
B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
IC. Spillage:
1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to
I migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces including precast concrete panels and similar
rough textures. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of
adjoining surfaces by either primer/sealer to the sealant/caulking compound.
I
Page 5 of 6
SECTION 07 79 00 JOINT SEALERS
2. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as work progresses. Clean the 1
adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage
without damaging substrate.
D. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
3.5 TESTS FOR PERFORMANCE
A. After nominal cure of exterior joint sealants which are exposed to weather, test for water leaks.
Flood joint exposure with water directed from a 3/4 inch garden hose held perpendicular to wall
face 2'-0" from joint, connected to a water system with 30 psi minimum static water pressure at
the nozzle. Move stream of water along joint at an approximate rate of 20 feet per minute. 111
B. Test approximately 5% of total joint system in locations which are typical of every joint
condition, and which can be inspected easily for leakage on opposite face. Conduct test in
presence of the General Contractor who will determine a actual percentage of joints to be tested
and actual period of exposure to water from hose, based upon extent of observed leakage, or
lack thereof. Repair sealant installation at leaks or, if leakage is excessive, replace sealant
installation as directed.
C. Where nature of observed leakage indicates possibility of inadequate joints bond strength,
General Contractor will direct additional testing be performed at a time when joints have been
fully cured.
I
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation. I
B. Protect sealants until cured.
I
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
Page 6 of 6
1
i
SECTION 09 20 00-STUCCO
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 specification
Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Applications over wall sheathing.
2. Applications over masonry surfaces.
3. Accent foam sections.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
' 1. Section 03300-Concrete.
2. Section 06110-Wood Framing
3. Section 07600-Flashing and Sheet Metal.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work of this section includes all the equipment, materials and labor necessary to complet a stucco
system, as indicated in the documents and as referred to in the Succo Resource Guide,as published by
the Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide systems complying with the following performance requirement:
' 1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and
supporting wall construction,resulting from exposure to fire,wind loads,weather,or other in-
service conditions.
1 2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies
behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-
insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind system
including substrates,supporting wall construction,and interior finish.
3. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to
' those tested for fire performance characteristics acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
a. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested
individually per ASTM E 84.
0 9 2 0 0 0 - 1
1
I
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each component of the stucco system. I
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of system including plans, elevations
sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and
between system and construction penetrating it, and attachments to construction behind
system.
D. Submit Samples for selection and verification purposes in form of small-scale samples
indicating available textural choices and custom color for approval.
I
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm with not less than 5 years successful experience in
manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has not less than 5 years successful experience in
completing systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance and who is certified in
writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from either a single manufacturer or
manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components. I
D. General Contractor to organize a pre-installation meeting with all trades and building representatives
two weeks prior to application of material. Subcontractor shall provide the NWCB "Scope of Work
Responsibilities Tables, and the Stucco Quality Assurance Checklist section from the Stucco Resource
111
Guide,as a part of the meeting.
1.7
DELIVERY>STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in original, unopened packages and containers with manufacturer's labels identifying
products legible and intact. All materials shall be purchased for this project directly. No materials to
be used from any other purchase from any other project.
B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from the weather, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, aging, corrosion,damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic,and
other causes.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor temperatures are unacceptable
per the manufacturer and the NWCB, unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain
necessary ambient temperatures.
0 9 2 0 0 0 - 2
I
B. It is required within this project, for the General Contractor or Associated Subcontractor to provide
partial or complete scaffolding, temporary shelter, tenting or tarpping and temporary heating as
required to complete this portion of the project within the construction schedule. No extension of time
will be given for adverse weather associated with the stucco system.
C. Temporary protection shall not alter the warranty or temperature standards established by the
manufacturer.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of system with related work specified in other sections-to ensure that wall
assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from weather,
aging,corrosion and other causes.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide system of one of the following:
1. Senergy Inc.
2. Dryvit
1 3. Or approved equal or alternate.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing fabrics, base and finish coat materials,
sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system
manufacturer.
' C. Colors and Textures of Protective Coating: Provide selections made by Architect of custom color and
textures for type of finish coat indicated.
D. Surface-Sealer: System manufacturer's standard adhesion intermediary designed to improve bond
between substrate of type indicated and adhesive for application of insulation.
E. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for
indicated use,compatible with substrate,and complying with the following requirements:
1. Job-mixed formulation of Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type 1 and
' polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat.
2. Factory-mixed formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrates of type
indicated,as approved by system manufacturer.
3. Either job-mixed or ready-mixed formulation indicated above.
i
0 9 2 0 0 0 - 3
I
F. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of
polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type I,approved
by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner squareness,other dimensional tolerances
and the following: I
1. Age insulation in block form prior to cutting and shipping by air drying for not less than 6
weeks or by another method approved by system manufacturer that produces equivalent
results.
2. Provide insulation in boards not less than 2 feet by 4 feet and in thickness indicated but not
less than that allowed by system manufacturer. I
G. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid,cellular thermal insulation with closed cells and integral
high-density skin,formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply I with ASTM C 578 for Type IV;with 2.6 pcf minimum density and 5-year aged r-value of 5.4 and 5 at
40°F and 75°F and 75°F approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner
squareness and other dimensional tolerances; in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths; thickness
as indicated.
H. Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali-resistant open weave glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility
with other system materials; made from continuous multiend strands with tensile strength of not less
than 145 lb and 150 lb in warp and fill directions per ASTM D 1682; complying with ASTM D 578
and the following requirements for minimum weight:
1. Standard Reinforcing Fabric: 4.2 oz.per sq. yd. 1
2. Intermediate Reinforcing Fabric: 9.8 oz.per sq.yd.
3. Impact Resistant Reinforcing Fabric: 14.0 oz.per sq.yd.
I
4. Strip Reinforcing Fabric: 3.75 oz.per sq.yd.
I. Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for use indicated.
J. Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture and method of combining materials:
I
K. Water: Clean and potable.
L. Mechanical Fastener Assemblies: System manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fastener
assemblies, consisting of thermal cap, system manufacturer's standard washer and shaft attachments,
and fastener indicated below; selected for properties of pullout, tensile and shear strength required to I resist design loads of application indicated,capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation
board,and of the following description:
1. For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 inch to 0.112 inch in thickness, provide steel drill
screws complying with ASTM C 954.
2. For attachment to light-gage steel framing members (not less than 0.0179 inch in thickness),
provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002. Il
3. For attachment to wood framing members, provide steel drill screws complying with
ASTM C 1002. I
4. For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide sheathing dowel in the form of
plastic wing-tipped fastener with thermal cap, sized to fit insulation thickness indicated and
penetrate substrate to depth required to secure anchorage, or provide hammer-driven pin and
predrilled expandable nylon sheath.
0 9 2 0 0 0 - 4 1
I
2.3 MIXING
A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do
not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix
materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or
discard.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for
installation of system. Do not proceed with installation of system until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems.
Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior fmish
coatings on other work.
' B. Protect system, substrates and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during
installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates.
' C. Substrate Preparation: Prepare and clean substrates to comply with system manufacturer's requirements
to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
1. Apply surface sealer over substrates where required by system manufacturer for improving
1 adhesion.
2. Apply surface sealer over gypsum sheathing substrates where required by system manufacturer
to protect sheathing from premature degradation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's current published instructions for installation of system
as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
B. Adhesively and mechanically attach insulation to comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched trowel method in manner that results in adhesive
' coating entire surface of gypsum sheathing once insulation is adhered to sheathing, unless
system manufacturer instructions specify use of surface sealer in combination with ribbon and
dab method.
I
2. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period prescribed by system manufacturer
but not less than 24 hours,prior to beginning rasping and sanding insulation or application of
base coat and reinforcing fabric.
3. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with system manufacturer's
current requirements. Initially install approximately 50 percent of the total number of
r
0 9 2 0 0 0 - 5
1
1
fasteners required prior to application of reinforcing fabric. Install remainder after application r
of reinforcing fabric.
a) Space fasteners as indicated below: I
1) Vertically: Not more than 12 inches o.c. nor more than 12 inches from
bottom edge of starting course of insulation board. '
2) Horizontally: Not more than 16 inches o.c. on frame, masonry or concrete
substrates. Not more than 24 inches o.c.to match stud spacing.
b) Secure mechanical fasteners to framing members behind sheathed substrates so that
they penetrate framing members 5/8 inch or more and recess flush with exterior
surface of insulation board.
c) Secure mechanical fasteners to masonry and concrete substrates so that they penetrate
substrate 1 inch or more and recess flush with exterior surface of insulation board.
4. Apply boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally;begin first
course from a level base line and work upwards.
5. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern.
a) Offset joints of insulation from joints in sheathing.
6. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.
7. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously
even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards. If gaps occur, fill with
insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert without use of adhesive.
8. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than
1/16 inch from surface of insulation and yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create
depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.
9. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners and projections precisely and to produce edges and
shapes conforming to details indicated.
10. Install expansion joints at locations indicated and as follows:
a) Where expansion or control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind
insulation.
b) Where system abuts dissimilar materials.
c) Where required by system manufacturer.
d) Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps of width needed between
adjoining insulation edges as well as between insulation edges and dissimilar
adjoining surfaces projecting through insulation that produce joint widths indicated
after encapsulation of joint substrates with base coat, reinforcing fabric and finish
coat. '
11. Install additional control joints in Class PM system at locations indicated or, if not indicated,
at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect: I
0 9 2 0 0 0 - 6
I
I
I
a) Where distance between control joints exceeds 10'-0" in any direction.
Ib) Where area within panels produces a width to length ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.
c) Where panels formed by system change in size. Extend joints full width or height of
protective coating.
d) Above and below door and window openings.
I12. Install trim accessories at locations indicated. Mechanically fasten accessories to framing
members,concrete,or masonry.
I
13. Treat exposed edges of insulation to comply with system manufacturer's directions.
14. Cut grooves, rabbets, and other features in outside face of insulation with high-speed router
I and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that conform accurately to
profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than
3/4 inch.
1 15. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that
does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating.
I16. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness specified by system
manufacturer.
I 17. For Class PB system fully embed reinforcing fabric of type indicated below in wet base coat to
produce wrinkle-free installation with fabric continuous at corners and lapped or otherwise
treated at joints to comply with system manufacturer's requirements.
1 18. Standard reinforcing fabric unless otherwise indicated.
C. For Class PM system, cover insulation with reinforcing fabric and attach through insulation into
I
substrate by installing remainder of fasteners.
D. Trowel-apply base coat over and into reinforcing fabric in thickness specified by system manufacturer
to produce a flush,uniform surface with fabric fully embedded and prepared to receive finish coat.
E. Apply finish coat over dry base coat in thickness required by system manufacturer to produce a uniform
finish of texture and color matching approved sample.
I
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
I
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove protective coatings from
window and door frames and any other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive protective coating.
I
1
I
0 9 2 0 0 0 - 7
1
I
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer and system
manufacturer that ensures system's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. i
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
1
0 9 2 0 0 0 - 8
• 1
SECTION 09 29 00-GYPSUM BOARD
I
SECTION 092900-GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
111 2.2 MANUFACTURERS
1 A. Acceptable gypsum board system manufacturers:
1. U.S. Gypsum Company
2. Domtar Gypsum America,Inc.
3. Georgia-Pacific
4. National Gypsum Company
' B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board,Type X: ASTM C 1396.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured(rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
1
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 09 29 00-GYPSUM BOARD
B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and
mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1. Core: 5/8 inch,Type X. r
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
B. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221,Alloy 6063-T5.
C. Corner Beads: Metal 1
D. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216,type as required
E. Wall Channel: Aluminum end wall closure. Color match storefront
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
I
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board:Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: l0-by-10 glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. I
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
111
A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90.
1. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 111
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
Page 2 of 3 I
SECTION 09 29 00-GYPSUM BOARD
1 E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."
IPART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
IB. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
' C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges
I
with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used
1 for panels. Otherwise,attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
I
2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
I
E. Prefill open joints,rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
I
intended to receive tape.
G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1 1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
I
Painting."
H. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
' receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application
patterns.
1 I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove
from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during drywall application.
J. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION
I
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
1 SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Surface Preparation
2. Exterior painting and finishing.
3. Surface finish schedule.
B. Related Sections:
1 1. Section 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing Materials (ANSI/ASTM):
1. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and
Related Products.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ANSUASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of this project.
' B. Samples: Submit three samples 8 x 8 inch in size illustrating range of colors available for each
surface finishing product scheduled, for selection.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with
minimum three years documented experience,and approved by product manufacturer.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating
111 requirements for finishes.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for
mixing and reducing.
D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
' Page 1 of 4
SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
I
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient I
temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of
finishes,unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50
percent,unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F
for exterior;unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide lighting level as required at substrate surface. 1
1.08 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide two gallon containers of each exterior and interior color to Owner.
B. Label each container with color, room locations, and exterior location in addition to the I
manufacturer's label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS I
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
2. Benjamin Moore Paint Co.
3. Pratt&Lambert,Inc.
4. Sherwin Williams Company.
5. Miller Paint Co.
6. Rodda Paint Co.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 25 00
C. Products for each general purpose shall be by single manufacturer. Do not use products by I
different manufacturers over one another, except for shop prime coats specified in other
Sections.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Coatings:
1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating.
2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
Page 2 of 4 I
ISECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
I
B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
I
specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality.
2.03 FINISHES
IA. Refer to drawings for surface finish and color schedule.
I
B. Allow 15% extra paint, or as required, for deep tone colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
I3.01 EXAMINATION
1 A. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product
manufacturer.
I B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
I C. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums as
recommended by the manufacturer
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate.
I3.02 PREPARATION
1 A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or
finishing.
111 B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
ID. Impervious Surfaces:
1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach.
2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
IE. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces:
1. Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust.
I 2. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting;
clean by washing with solvent.
3. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are
I similarly cleaned.
4. Spot prime paint after repairs.
I F. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces:
1. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
2. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.
I3. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
Page 3 of 4
SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 111
1
G. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
3.03 PROTECTION I
A. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from '
disfiguring other surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site. '
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. I
E. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
F. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before
set. Wipe excess from surface.
3.05 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT I
A. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted
accidentally.
B. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment
before installing equipment.
C. Replace electrical plates,hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.06 CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds,promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. I
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris. I
C. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers and remove daily from site. I
END OF SECTION
I
Page 4 of 4 i
1
i NIK/,
MKE O ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
I 6915 S.W.Macadam Avenue,Suite 200,Portland,OR 97219
Phone:503-892-1188 FAX:503-892-1190
I PLANET FITNESS SHELL at TIGARD TOWN SQUARE
Tigard, OR
1 Table of Contents
IDivision 21 — Fire Suppression
ISection: Title:
21 00 01 Basic Fire Suppression Requirements
1 21 05 00 Fire Protection Basic Materials and Methods
21 13 00 Fire Suppression Sprinklers
1 Division 22 — Plumbing
ISection: Title:
22 00 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements
I 22 0519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping
22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping & Equipment
22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation
I 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping
22 10 06 Plumbing Piping Specialties
22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment
1
1 Division 23 — Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Section: Title:
I23 00 00 Basic HVAC Requirements
23 05 49 HVAC Seismic Restraint
I 23 0713 Duct Insulation
2310 05 Fuel Piping
23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings
1 23 7412 Packaged Outdoor Rooftop Units—Small Capacity
I
1 5194 MTOC_Check Set
1 21 00 01 -BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD
ISECTION 21 00 01 -BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD
IPART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for all Contractor design and installed
equipment. It applies to all sections included in Division 21.
B. Provide complete coverage Per NFPA 13 and all local codes for the entire shell buildings.
IBuilding is approximately 51,000 square feet. Coverage shall include,but not be limited to
floor areas,attic spaces and canopies.
I C. Contractor shall provide complete engineering calculations and design of the fire protection
system satisfying the direction and criteria of this specification and all other supporting
documents and drawings.
I D. Provide the design and all materials, labor and equipment required to install a complete and
fully operational fire protection system as indicated by the contract drawings and this
specification.
I E. Contractor shall not compromise or diminish any existing building system,service or function
in his execution of the work. Any such potential impacts shall be immediately brought to the
attention of the Architect/Engineer.
F. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and taxes applicable to this project as required by
law.
G. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information required for installation
Iand operation of mechanical items.
H. Requirements for the following are included:
I 1. Related work(other Contract Documents and specification sections)that must be
combined with the requirements of this Section.
2. Design performance.
3. Delivery,storage, and handling.
4. Quality assurance and standards.
5. Submittals.
I 6. Product quality,basic type, and finishes.
7. Equipment identification.
8. Design criteria.
I
9.
10. Excavation and backfill.
Installation.
11. Mounting and shimming.
I 12. Inspection.
13. Safety considerations.
14. Cleaning, startup,and adjustments.
I1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and
related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for the project equipment and
Isystems:
1. Division 1 sections included in this Project specifications.
1112. The Contract.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 7
21 00 01 -BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD
3. General and specific mechanical specifications and drawings included in the project.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Indicated": Refers to graphic representations,notes or schedule's in the Drawings; or to other
paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents.
1. Terms such as"shown", "noted", "scheduled",and"specified", are used to notify or
help the user to locate reference. Location is not limited.
B. "Directed": Terms such as"directed",Requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved",
"required", and"permitted"mean directed by Architect/Engineer, approved by
Architect/Engineer and similar phrases.
C. "Approved": When used in conjunction with Architect/Engineer's action on contract
submittals, applications,requests, is limited to Architect/Engineer's duties and responsibilities I
as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
D. "Regulations": Includes laws;ordinances, statutes and lawful orders issued by authorities
having jurisdiction, as well as rules,conventions and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of Work.
E. "Furnish": Means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,unpacking,
assembly, installation and similar operations.
F. "Install": Describes operations at Project site including actual unloading,temporary storage,
unpacking, assembling, erecting,placing, anchoring, supporting, isolating, applying,working
to dimension, finishing, curing,protecting, cleaning and similar operations.
G. "Provide": Means to furnish and install.
H. "Installer": A contractor,or another entity engaged by the contractor, either as an employee, '
subcontractor, or contractor of a lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity
including installation,erection, application or similar operations.
1. Installers are required to be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform. I
2. The term"experience"means having successfully completed a minimum of three
previous projects similar in scope and size to this Project and within the time frame
indicated in the"Quality Assurance" section of the Specifications. In addition,in
means being familiar with special requirements indicated and having complied with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. "Project Site": Is defined as the space available to the Contractor for performing construction ,
activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of
Project.
1.04 DESIGN PERFORMANCE
A. Compliance by the Contractor and/or Vendor with the provisions of this Specification does not
relieve him of the responsibilities of furnishing equipment and materials of proper design,
mechanically suited to meet operating guarantees at the specified service conditions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit five complete sets of manufacturer's product data in a three ring binder
for approval. Literature submitted shall clearly indicate the model number, capacity,rated
operating conditions, size,weight, support requirements,electrical power requirements,utility
(fuel, air, cooling water, etc.)requirements, and options furnished. Submittals shall include,
but are not necessarily limited to the following;
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 7
21 00 01 -BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD
1. Fire Protection: Piping materials; valves; fittings; supports; switches; alarms;
backflow devices; sprinkler heads; compressors; fire pumps and the like. Provide
I
2. minimum 36 x 24 size system layout shop drawings. Provide hydraulic calculations.
Calculations: Provide for sizing of all utility services, including fire sprinkler main and
all building piping;pumps head and flow sizing for all systems; thermal expansion and
' seismic restraints; and all other calculations and all other calculations consistent with
good engineering practice. Include design criteria used and assumptions made.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit three complete sets of manufacturer's literature
bound in a three ring binder for approval.Data shall include installation, start-up,and
maintenance instructions,parts lists,and wiring diagrams.
C. Substitutions: System design was based upon the equipment and materials listed on the
drawings and specifications herein.At contractor's option,another manufacturer's equipment
of similar quality,capacity and features may be submitted for prior approval per Section 01 33
00. Prior permission to substitute does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of
' including this information in the bound submittal packages.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the latest versions of the following
codes, standards and specifications,except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified:
' 1. State of Oregon"IBC".
2. State of Oregon"IMC".
3. State of Oregon"UPC".
4. State of Oregon "IFC".
S. NFPA 13.
B. Drawings: Any drawings provided are diagrammatic and show general intent,arrangement,
and extent of the systems. Do not scale drawings for rough-in dimensions,nor use as shop
drawings.
' C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work required with a
minimum of five years documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
' A. Delivery: Deliver to site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Preparation for shipment:
I1. Each unit shall be suitably prepared for the shipment specified and for storage in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions in a manner requiring no disassembly
prior to operation.
' 2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of the Preparation for
Shipment provisions employed with respect to materials and application.
3. One complete set of Installations, Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be
packed and shipped with the equipment. This set is in addition to the sets that are to
be sent directly to the Owner.
C. Handling: Avoid damage. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction requirements
for rigging,unloading and transporting units.
D. Storage: Inside protected from weather,dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store
outside,elevate well above grade and enclose with durable,waterproof wrapping. Cap all pipe
ends. Taping pipe ends is not adequate or allowable.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 7
21 00 01 -BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Provide products that are compatible with other portions of the work and provide
products with the proper power characteristics and similar adaptations for the project.
B. Arrangement: Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction and with
a minimum 7 feet overhead clearance in unfinished equipment rooms where possible. Conceal
all piping where possible unless indicated otherwise. Locate operating and control equipment
properly to provide easy access for operation and maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping
which must be sloped for drainage. Set all equipment level or as recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Coordination: Where several elements of the work must be sequenced and positioned in order
to fit the available space,prepare shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions (at
accurate scale) required for installation and submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of
any of the elements involved in the coordination.
1.09 STANDARDS '
A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in
successful operation for a minimum of five years. Provide materials of comparable quality
omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated
capacities, minus 5%to plus 10% as approved in each case.
B. Governing Standards: The following are typical standards generally referenced in these
specifications and identified by their acronym. Factory Mutual(FM),Federal Specifications
(FS),American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM),American National Standards Institute
(ANSI), Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Standard
Practice(MSS SP-69),Underwriters Laboratory(UL)numbers are given.
1.10 WARRANTIES111
'
A. Contractor shall provide a 1-year warranty on all equipment,materials and workmanship for a
period of one year from the date of owner's acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION
A. Site Examination: Before starting work,carefully examine site and all Contract Drawings.
Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all •
indicated elevations,building measurements,rough-in dimensions and equipment locations
before proceeding with any work.
B. Utility Locations: All on-site utilities to be new. See civil documents.
C. Discrepancies: Any error, conflict or discrepancy in Specifications and/or existing conditions
shall be reported immediately. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until I
clarification of same has been made. Under no circumstances shall beams, girders, footings,or
columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited.
3.02 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Fire Suppression:
i
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 7
21 00 01 -BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD
1. In accordance with NFPA 13.
' 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. General: Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for the installation of
mechanical work. Any piping or other work damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be
repaired at the Contractor's expense.
B. Water: Keep all excavations free of standing water. Excavations damaged or softened by
water or frost shall be re-excavated and filled back to original level with approved material at
' the Contractor's expense.
C. Test: During the progress of the work for compacted fill,the Owner reserves the right to
request compaction tests made under the direction of a testing laboratory.
' D. Trench Excavation: Excavate trenches to the necessary depth and width,removing rocks,
unstable soil(silt,peat,etc.)roots and stumps. Width of trench shall be adequate for proper
installation of piping or conduit.
E. Foundation and Bedding:
1. Proper preparation of foundation,placement of foundation material where required,
and placement of bedding material shall precede the installation of the pipe. This shall
include leveling of the trench bottom as well as placement and compaction of required
bedding material to a uniform grade so that piping rests upon continuous and uniform
bedding.
2. Where excavation has been made below the required grade,the Contractor shall
provide,place and compact suitable bedding material to restore the proper grade
' elevation.
F. Backfilling: Upon acceptance of installed piping systems,trenches shall be backfilled in lifts.
Backfill material shall be placed and compacted in lifts not to exceed 6 inches in depth to a
' height of 1 inch above the top of trench.Backfill shall be placed to obtain contact with the
entire periphery of the pipe without disturbing pipe placement.
G. Compaction: One of the following methods or combination thereof shall be required: (1)
' Mechanical Tamper,or(2)Vibratory Compactor. Compaction shall be sufficient to attain
95%of maximum density at optimum moisture content. Water"puddling" or"washing" is
prohibited.
H. Bedding/Backfill Material: Where native material has been removed,necessary foundation
material consisting of 3/4 inch minus crushed rock or fill sand shall be placed and compacted
to form a firm base of the required thickness. Backfill material shall be the same. Follow the
pipe manufacturer's installation instructions when specified materials are specifically
prohibited.
3.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING
A. Provide all motor starters,control devices, and wiring complete from power source indicated
on Drawings.
B. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements
of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may
be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable
system controls for the actual selected equipment/system.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 7
21 00 01 -BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves, fittings, etc., on pipe
systems.
B. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes and Regulations and good common
practice in locating and installing equipment and material so that completed installation
presents the least possible hazard. Maintain recommended clearances for repair and service to
all equipment.
C. Installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer, ,
including special requirements for seismic restraints.
D. Equipment Manufacturer's Responsibility and Services:
1. A manufacturer's representative for major equipment and operating systems shall be
provided as necessary to assist the Contractor during installation, and to provide
written certification that the equipment has been installed as specified and in
accordance with the manufacturer's representative.
2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide the initial startup of equipment in the
presence of the Owner.
a. Provide a pre-start check of all piping, valves, control devices, control panels,
and equipment.
b. Calibrate and adjust equipment and controls for operation at the specified
design and conditions. I
c. Provide a record of all startup events noting problems and their resolution.
d. Provide a record of all set points for operational controls and devices.
3. Upon the completion of the equipment startup,provide instructional time with the
Owner's personnel to review the operations and maintenance manuals and perform
each step necessary for startup, shutdown,troubleshooting, and routine maintenance.
The instructional time shall be scheduled through the Owner.
4. Upon completion of the inspections, startup,testing, and checkout procedures,the
equipment manufacturer shall submit written notice to the Owner that the units are
ready for use by the Owner. Provide a certificate of calibration for all equipment.
E. Anchorage: Anchor and/or brace all mechanical equipment,piping and ductwork to resist
displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on equipment mounted on spring
isolators. '
3.06 MOUNTING AND SHIMMING
A. Mount equipment as shown on the Drawings. Provisions for mounting special equipment on
spring isolators, snubbers, and inertia bases are specified in Division 15.
B. Level the equipment by means of 304 stainless steel wedges (stainless steel plates and stainless
steel shims) or PVC/poly wedges in areas of extreme corrosive environments. Wedge taper '
shall not be greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing
surface for the equipment. Secure each pair of wedges in their final positions with one tack
weld on each side after leveling is complete. Wedging shall be executed in a manner that will
prevent a change in level or springing of the Baseplate when the anchor bolts are tightened.
1. Adjust rotating equipment assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned,
plumb and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings.
2. All rotating equipment shall be checked for proper alignment with dial indicators or
laser after completion of grouting. The alignment must be within the tolerances
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 7
21 00 01 -BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD
required by the equipment manufacturer. The final alignment check shall be
witnessed by the Owner.
3.07 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall inspect his work to ensure the installation and workmanship is in
accordance with these specifications and acceptable industry standards.
B. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the
Owner. Contractor shall correct any work,materials,or equipment not in accordance with the
' Contract Documents.
3.08 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
A. All equipment shall be installed with suitable access clearances that satisfy OSHA and code
requirements for maintenance or removal of replaceable parts and components,and with
necessary unions or flanges to perform the maintenance or removal without removing the
connecting appurtenances.
B. Where equipment or devices requiring periodic maintenance cannot be reached by normal
walkways because of interference with ductwork,piping,or other obstructions the Contractor
shall notify the Owner and propose an alternate safe means of access. These may include
construction of an overhead platform with stairway or ladder ends and safety railings or
handholds, or walk-through duct plenums with hinged access doors,or as required to meet
OSHA standards for safe maintenance procedures.
3.09 CLEANING, START-UP,AND ADJUSTING
A. The Contractors shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems,minor subsystems,
and services provided under this section. He shall coordinate start-up procedures, calibration,
and system checkout with all project managers. Any system operational problems shall be
' diagnosed; all correctional procedures shall be initiated as required to bring out the system into
compliance with the design, and the problem then shall be rechecked to verify that the system
operates normally.
' B. Thoroughly clean all parts of the installation at the completion of the work. The Contractor
shall clean up and remove from the premises all refuse material, crates,and rubbish arising
from his work. All motors and bearings shall be lubricated in accordance with the
' manufacturer's service manuals prior to equipment start-up. Provide a lubrication schedule for
every item of equipment furnished under this section. The schedule shall include the type of
lubricant and the application frequency.
' END OF SECTION 21 00 01
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 7
21 05 00-FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 21 05 00-FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
' PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
' A. Pipe,fittings,valves,and connections for sprinkler systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
' A. Section 21 13 00-Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler systems design.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
' A. ASME(BPV IX) -Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX-Welding and Brazing
Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
B. ASME B16.1 -Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125,and 250; The
' American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005.
C. ASME B 16.3 -Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
' Engineers; 2006.
D. ASME B 16.4-Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2006.
' E. ASME B16.5 -Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2009(ANSI/ASME B16.5).
F. ASME B16.9-Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
G. ASME B16.11 -Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded; The American Society
of Mechanical Engineers; 2009.
' H. ASME B 16.25 -Buttwelding Ends; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
I. ASTM A47/A47M-Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 2009.
' J. ASTM A53/A53M-Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless; 2007.
K. ASTM A135/A135M- Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe;
' 2009.
L. ASTM A234/A234M- Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel
and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2007.
M. ASTM A795/A795M- Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized)Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2008.
N. AWWA C110/A21.10-American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings,3
In. Through 48 In. (75 mm Through 1200 mm),for Water and Other Liquids;American Water
Works Association; 2008.
' O. AWWA C111/A21.11 -Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings;
American Water Works Association; 2007(ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11).
P. AWWA C151/A21.51 -Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast,for Water;American Water
' Works Association;2009(ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51).
Q. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems;National Fire Protection
' Association; 2010.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 6
21 05 00-FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
R. UL(FPED) -Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. UL 262 -Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current 1
Edition,Including All Revisions.
T. UL 312 -Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. I
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used,jointing methods, supports, floor and wall
penetration seals. Indicate installation,layout,weights,mounting and support details, and
piping connections. Shop drawings shall be minimum 36 x 24 size.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Valve Stern Packings: Two for each type and size of valve.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE r
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
C. Conform to UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey requirements. '
D. Valves: Bear UL,FM, and Warnock Hersey label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name
and pressure rating marked on valve body.
E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING '
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers,with labeling in place.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.
2.02 BURIED PIPING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 6
21 05 00-FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
1. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111,rubber gasket.
' 3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket,steel bolts,nuts,and
washers.
2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A795 Schedule 10,ASTM A53 Schedule 40,ASTM A135/A135M
Schedule 10,ASTM A135/A135M UL listed light wall type,or ASTM A795 Schedule 40,
' black or galvanized.
1. Steel Fittings: ASME B 16.9,wrought steel,buttwelded,ASME B 16.5,buttweld ends,
ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought carbon steel or alloy steel,ASME B16.5, steel
'
2. flanges and fittings,or ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.
Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1,flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4,
threaded fittings.
' 3.
4. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3,threaded fittings and ASTM A 47/A 47M.
Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,
"C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts,nuts,and washers; galvanized for
'
5. galvanized pipe.
Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and 0-ring
pocked and 0-ring,uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement
onto pipe.
2.04 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS
A. FlexHead Industries flexible sprinkler connections.
2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable swivel,
' split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,clevis.
' C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp or angle ring.
' G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,nipple,floor flange, and concrete
pier or steel support.
H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable,copper plated.
' 2.06 GATE VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 inches:
' 1. Bronze body,bronze trim,rising stem,handwheel, solid wedge or disc,threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches:
1. Iron body,bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch,
' handwheel,OS&Y,solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge,flanged ends.
C. Over 4 inches:
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 6
21 05 00-FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS '
1. Iron body,bronze trim,non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge,
flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly.
2.07 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES ,
A. Up to and including 2 inches:
1. Bronze body,bronze trim,rising stem and handwheel, inside screw,renewable rubber
disc,threaded ends,with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.
B. Over 2 inches:
1. Iron body,bronze trim,rising stem,handwheel, OS&Y,plug-type disc, flanged ends,
renewable seat and disc.
2.08 BALL VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 inches:
1. Bronze two piece body,brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball,teflon seats
and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops,threaded ends with union.
B. Over 2 inches:
1. Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball,teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever
handle or gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged. '
2.09 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Cast or Ductile Iron Body
1. Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc,
resilient replaceable EPDM seat,wafer, lug,or grooved ends, extended neck,
handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and internal tamper switch
rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC or external tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
2.10 CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 inches: '
1. Bronze body and swing disc,rubber seat,threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches:
1. Iron body,bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc,renewable disc and seat, flanged
ends with automatic ball check.
C. 4 inches and Over:
1. Iron body,bronze disc, stainless steel spring,resilient seal,threaded,wafer, or flanged
ends.
2.11 DRAIN VALVES ,
A. Ball Valve:
1. Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. '
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside,before assembly. '
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 6
I21 05 00-FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
3.02 INSTALLATION
I A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping,hangers, and supports in accordance with
NFPA 13.
B. Route piping in orderly manner,plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
IC. Install piping to conserve building space,to not interfere with use of space and other work.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
IE. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions,walls,and floors.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or
connected equipment.
IG. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
I 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4
I 4. inches.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling,locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide
I through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
H. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
I 2. adjacent work.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
I 4. movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
I 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation,provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
6. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers
I and supports located in crawl spaces,pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not
considered exposed.
I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain
I
top of pipe level.
J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports,and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support
members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,brush clean,and apply one coat of
Izinc rich primer to welding. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
I L. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings,floors,and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations
to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
M. When installing more than one piping system material,ensure system components are
I compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings.
Ensure flanges,union,and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
N. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or
Iother non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 6
21 05 00-FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior
to installation.
P. Provide gate,ball,or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. '
Q. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
R. The fire sprinkler contractor shall coordinate and provide for the location of all fire sprinkler
drain piping and drain receptor piping,whether or not indicated on the contract documents.
The routing of low point drains to any location where there is no drain receptor is NOT
acceptable. '
END OF SECTION 21 05 00
I
1
1
1
i
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 6
21 13 00-FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
SECTION 21 13 00 -FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
' PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
' A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.
B. Dry-pipe sprinkler system.
' C. System design, installation, and certification.
D. Fire department connections.
1 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00-Firestopping.
B. Section 14 91 00-Facility Chutes: Sprinkler heads inside chutes.
C. Section 21 05 00-Fire Protection Basic Materials and Methods: Pipe, fittings,and valves.
D. Division 26: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ICC-ES ACO 1 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2003.
' B. ICC-ES AC106-Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners(Screw Anchors)in Masonry
Elements; 2006.
C. ICC-ES AC193 -Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010.
' D. ICC-ES AC308-Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements; 2009.
' E. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems;National Fire Protection
Association; 2010.
F. UL(FPED)-Fire Protection Equipment Directory;Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
' edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
' A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers,valves,and specialties,including manufacturers
catalog information. Submit performance ratings,rough-in details,weights, support
requirements, and piping connections.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations
' coordinated with ceiling installation.
2. Indicate hydraulic calculations,detailed pipe layout,hangers and supports, sprinklers,
components and accessories. Indicate system controls.
3. Submit shop drawings,product data,and hydraulic calculations to authority having
jurisdiction and Fire Marshall for approval. Submit proof of approval to
Architect/Engineer.
' 4. Shop drawings shall be minimum 36 x 24 size.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 5
21 13 00-FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping
from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds code
requirements.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements,
record drawings, inspection data,replacement part numbers and availability, and location and
numbers of service depot.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed,in quantity required by
referenced NFPA design and installation standard.
3. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site.
B. Conform to UL requirements.
C. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Oregon.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
F. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking.
G. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide
temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS '
2.01 SPRINKLER SYSTEM
A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building shell, including all necessary
modifications to existing sprinkler system to make this shell space compliant with NFPA 13
and all local codes.
B. Occupancy: Light hazard; comply with NFPA 13. I
C. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data.
D. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. '
E. Provide fire department connections where indicated, or as required by Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
F. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve.
G. Pipe Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. '
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 5
1
21 13 00-FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
I2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
1 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
I7. Manufacturers:
a. Powers Fasteners, Inc.: www.powers.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
I2.02 SPRINKLERS
A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate.
Il 1. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell (GEM): www.simplexgrinnell.com.
b. Reliable: www.reliablesprinkler.com.
Ic. Central.
2. Response Type: Quick or Standard.
3. Coverage Type: Standard or Extended.
1 4. Finish: Chrome plated.
5. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
6. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type, temperature rated for
Ispecific area hazard.
B. Exposed Area Type: Standard type .
I 1. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell(GEM)Model "A": www.simplexgrinnell.com.
b. Central.
I 2. c. Reliable: www.reliablesprinkler.com.
Response Type: Quick or Standard.
3. Coverage Type: Standard or Extended.
4. Finish: Brass.
I5. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type,temperature rated for
specific area hazard.
I C. Sidewall Type: Recessed horizontal Sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell(GEM)Model "A",Universal Sidewall: www.simplexgrinnell.com.
I
b. Central.
c. Reliable: www.reliablesprinkler.com.
2. Response Type: Quick or Standard.
I
3.
4. Coverage Type: Standard or Extended.
Finish: Chrome plated.
5. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
I 6. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type,temperature rated for
specific area hazard.
D. Dry Sprinklers: Recessed pendant type with matching push on estucheon plate.
I 1. Manufacturers:
a. Central.
b. Grinnell (BEW): www.simplexgrinnell.com.
Ic. Reliable: www.reliablesprinkler.com.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 5
21 13 00-FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
2. Response Type: Quick or Standard.
3. Coverage Type: Standard or Extended.
4. Finish: Brass. '
5. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass.
6. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type,temperature rated for
specific area hazard. I
2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced
clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with pressure retard
chamber and variable pressure trim;with test and drain valve.
B. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring,rubber faced I
clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with accelerator; with
test and drain valve.
C. Flooding Deluge Valve: Gate type valve with rubber faced disc actuated electrically with I
water motor alarm and electric alarm,with alarm testing trim.
D. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch.
E. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical,with two contacts;
rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. Grinnell Model VSR-1.
F. Fire Department Connections:
1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish.
2. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware;threaded dust cap
and chain of matching material and finish. I
3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside or connected to drain.
4. Label: "Sprinkler-Fire Department Connection".
G. Air Compressor: Single unit, electric motor driven,motor,motor starter, safety valves, check
valves, air maintenance device incorporating electric pressure switch and unloader valve.
Refer to Division 26 for electrical characteristics.
H. Supervisory Switches: As manufactured by Grinnell OSYSU-1 or OSYSU-2,Potter-Roemer
Figure 6220, or approved equal.
2.04 AIR COMPRESSOR I
A. Compressor: Single unit,electric motor driven,motor, motor starter, safety valves, check
valves, air maintenance device incorporating electric pressure switch and unloader valve.
B. Electrical Characteristics:
1. Horsepower: Refer to Division 26.
2. 60 Hz. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION 1
A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I
C. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 5
21 13 00-FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
I D. Locate fire department connection with sufficient 1
p s fficien clearance from walls,obstructions, or
I
adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
E. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall.
F. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
I G. Place piping as high as possible, in concealed spaces above finished ceilings and within wall
cavities.
I H. Center sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable,
dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements.
I. Provide oversize escutcheons on all sprinklers to allow for seismic movement.
I J. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler
escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted
sprinklers.
IK. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
L. Hydrostatically test entire system.
IM. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal and Architect/Engineer.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
I A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.
3.03 START-UP AND TESTING
I A. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are
prescribed by manufacturer,proceed as follows:
1. Verify that specialty valves,trim, fittings, controls,and accessories have been installed
correctly and operate correctly.
I2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
3. Check that damaged sprinkler and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified have
been replaced with new, correct type of sprinklers.
I4. Check that sprinklers are correct type,have correct finish and temperature ratings, and
have guards where required for applications.
5. Check that potable water supplies have correct type of backflow preventer.
I6. Check that hose valves and fire department connections have threads compatible with
local fire department equipment and have correct pressure rating.
7. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler systems with water.
I8. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
9. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.
I3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and maintenance
information.
IB. Schedule demonstration with at least 7 days advance notice.
END OF SECTION 21 13 00
I
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 5
1
22 00 00-BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
1 SECTION 22 00 00 -BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
IPART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
IA. This Section specifies the basic requirements for all Contractor installed equipment. It applies
to all sections included in Division 22. The requirements herein are an expansion upon the
requirements of Division 1.
IB. Provide all materials,labor and equipment required to install complete and fully operational
plumbing systems as indicated by the contract drawings and this specification.
I C. Obtain and pay for all permits,licenses,fees and taxes applicable to this project as required by
law.
D. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information required for installation
1 and operation of mechanical items.
E. Requirements for the following are included:
1. Related work(other Contract Documents and specification sections)that must be
Icombined with the requirements of this Section.
2. Design performance.
3. Delivery, storage,and handling.
I4. Quality assurance and standards.
5. Submittals.
6. Product quality,basic type, and finishes.
I7. Equipment identification.
8. Design criteria.
9. Excavation and backfill.
I10. Installation.
11. Mounting and shimming.
12. Inspection.
I
13. Safety considerations.
14. Cleaning, startup, and adjustments.
I 1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and
related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for the project equipment and
I systems:
1. Division 1 sections included in this Project specifications.
2. The Contract.
I
3. General and specific mechanical specifications and drawings included in the project.
4. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers.
I 1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Indicated": Refers to graphic representations,notes or schedules in the Drawings; or to other
paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents.
I 1. Terms such as"shown","noted","scheduled", and"specified",are used to notify or
help the user to locate reference. Location is not limited.
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 8
22 00 00-BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
B. "Directed": Terms such as"directed",Requested", "authorized","selected", "approved",
"required", and"permitted"mean directed by Architect/Engineer, approved by
Architect/Engineer and similar phrases. I
C. "Approved": When used in conjunction with Architect/Engineer's action on contract
submittals, applications,requests, is limited to Architect/Engineer's duties and responsibilities
as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
D. "Regulations": Includes laws, ordinances, statutes and lawful orders issued by authorities
having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of Work.
E. "Furnish": Means to supply and deliver to the Project site,ready for unloading,unpacking,
assembly, installation and similar operations.
F. "Install": Describes operations at Project site including actual unloading,temporary storage,
unpacking,assembling, erecting,placing, anchoring, supporting, isolating, applying,working
to dimension, finishing,curing,protecting,cleaning and similar operations. '
G. "Provide": Means to furnish and install.
H. "Installer": A contractor, or another entity engaged by the contractor,either as an employee,
subcontractor,or contractor of a lower tier,to perform a particular construction activity
including installation, erection, application or similar operations.
1. Installers are required to be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform.
2. The term"experience"means having successfully completed a minimum of three
- previous projects similar in scope and size to this Project and within the time frame
indicated in the"Quality Assurance" section of the Specifications. In addition, in
means being familiar with special requirements indicated and having complied with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. "Project Site": Is defined as the space available to the Contractor for performing construction
activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of
Project.
1.04 DESIGN PERFORMANCE
A. Compliance by the Contractor and/or Vendor with the provisions of this Specification does not
relieve him of the responsibilities of furnishing equipment and materials of proper design,
mechanically suited to meet operating guarantees at the specified service conditions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit complete sets of manufacturer's product data in .PDF format for I
approval. Literature submitted shall clearly indicate the model number, capacity,rated
operating conditions,noise levels, size,weight, support requirements,rough-in data and
dimensions, electrical power requirements,wiring diagrams,utility(fuel, air,cooling water,
etc.)requirements, and options furnished. Submittals shall include,but are not necessarily
limited to the following;
1. Plumbing: Piping and insulation; Plumbing fixtures, including trim; insulation;
valves; hangers and supports; equipment bases; isolators; water heaters; booster
pumps and the like.
2. Calculations: Provide for sizing of all utility services, including waste,water, and gas;
water heater sizing;pumps head and flow sizing for all systems;thermal expansion
and seismic restraints; and all other calculations consistent with good engineering
practice. Include design criteria used and assumptions made.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 8
22 00 00-BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
I
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit three complete sets of manufacturer's literature
bound in a three ring binder for approval. Data shall include installation, start-up, and
I
maintenance instructions,parts lists,and wiring diagrams.
C. Substitutions: System design was based upon the equipment and materials listed on the
I drawings and specifications herein. At contractor's option,another manufacturer's equipment
of similar quality,capacity and features may be submitted for prior approval per Section 01 60
00. Prior permission to substitute does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of
I including this information in the bound submittal packages.
. UALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and
specifications,except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. State of Oregon"IBC".
2. State of Oregon"IMC".
I3. State of Oregon"UPC".
4. State of Oregon"IFC".
5. ANSUASHRAE 90-"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings...."
I6. ANSUASHRAE 62 -"Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality."
7. NEBB -"Procedural Standard for Testing,Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems."
8. ANSI B31.9 "Building Service Piping".
9. SMACNA-"HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
10. NFPA-Sections 13, 54 and 90B.
IB. Drawings: All drawings are diagrammatic and show general design,arrangement, and extent
of the systems. Do not scale drawings for rough-in dimensions,nor use as shop drawings.
I C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work required with a
minimum of five years documented experience.
D. Contractor shall furnish and install all work in accordance with manufacturers'
Irecommendations and instructions.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
IA. Delivery: Deliver to site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Preparation for shipment:
1. Each unit shall be suitably prepared for the shipment specified and for storage in
Iaccordance with manufacturer's instructions in a manner requiring no disassembly
prior to operation.
2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of the Preparation for
Shipment provisions employed with respect to materials and application.
3. One complete set of Installations,Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be
packed and shipped with the equipment. This set is in addition to the sets that are to
1 be sent directly to the Owner.
C. Handling: Avoid damage. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction requirements
for rigging,unloading and transporting units.
ID. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store
outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable,waterproof wrapping. Cap all pipe
1 ends. Taping pipe ends is not adequate or allowable.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 8
22 00 00-BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide
products with the proper power characteristics and similar adaptations for the project.
B. Arrangement: Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction and with
a minimum 7 feet overhead clearance in unfinished equipment rooms where possible. Conceal
all piping and ductwork where possible unless indicated otherwise. Locate operating and
control equipment properly to provide easy access for operation and maintenance. Give
right-of-way to piping which must be sloped for drainage. Set all equipment level or as
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Coordination: Where several elements of the work must be sequenced and positioned in order
to fit the available space,prepare shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions (at
accurate scale)required for installation and submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of
any of the elements involved in the coordination.
1.09 STANDARDS
A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in
successful operation for a minimum of five years. Provide materials of comparable quality
omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated
capacities,minus 5%to plus 10% as approved in each case.
B. Governing Standards: The following are typical standards generally referenced in these
specifications and identified by their acronym. Federal Specifications (FS),American Society
for Testing Materials (ASTM), American National Standards Institute(ANSI),Manufacturer's
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Standard Practice(MSS SP-69),
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute(CISPI),Underwriters Laboratory(UL) numbers are given.
1.10 WARRANTIES
A. Contractor shall provide a 1 year warranty on all equipment, materials and workmanship for a
period of one year from the date of owner's acceptance.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS I
A. Provide two sets of faucet service kits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION
A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all Contract Drawings.
Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all
indicated elevations,building measurements,rough-in dimensions and equipment locations
before proceeding with any work.
111
B. Utility Locations: The location of all utilities,wires, conduits,pipes,ducts,or other service
facilities are shown in a general way only on the drawings and in some instances are taken
from existing drawings. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on
the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to
commencing installation.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 8
22 00 00-BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
I
C. Discrepancies: Any error,conflict or discrepancy in Drawings, Specifications and/or existing
1 conditions shall be reported immediately. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work
until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-routing of piping or
ductwork be necessary,provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular
portion of the work. Under no circumstances shall beams, girders,footings or columns be cut
Ifor mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on
Drawings.
I D. The Contractor shall cooperate with others to avoid interferences and delays in the
construction work.
E. Interference as a result of poor coordination or lack of cooperation with other trades shall be
Icorrected at the Contractor's expense.
3.02 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES
I A. Existing water,power,heat, ventilation, air conditioning and other services shall remain in
service during new construction work. Coordinate any interruption in service during new
construction work. Coordinate any interruption of these services with the Owner's
I representative a minimum of twenty-four(24)hours in advance.
B. Protect from damage active utilities existing and evident by reasonable inspection of the site
whether shown or not on the Drawings. Protect,relocate or abandon utilities encountered in
I the work which were not shown on the Drawings or evident by inspection of the work as
directed by the Architect. Maintain continuity of all utility services to existing buildings.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
IA. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1.
B. Protection: During cutting and patching,protect adjacent installations. Provide temporary
Ibarriers to prevent the spread of dust and dirt outside of the immediate work area.
C. Repair: Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials to match the
existing.
I D. Inspection: Upon written direction from the Architect,uncover and restore work to provide for
observation of concealed work.
I 3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. General: Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for the installation of
mechanical work. Any piping or other work damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be
I repaired at the Contractor's expense.
B. Water: Keep all excavations free of standing water. Excavations damaged or softened by
water or frost shall be re-excavated and filled back to original level with approved material at
the Contractor's expense.
C. Test: During the progress of the work for compacted fill,the Owner reserves the right to
request compaction tests made under the direction of a testing laboratory.
D. Trench Excavation: Excavate trenches to the necessary depth and width,removing rocks,
unstable soil(silt,peat,etc.)roots and stumps. Width of trench shall be adequate for proper
I installation of piping or conduit.
E. Foundation and Bedding:
1. Proper preparation of foundation,placement of foundation material where required,
Iand placement of bedding material shall precede the installation of the pipe. This shall
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 8
22 00 00-BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
include leveling of the trench bottom as well as placement and compaction of required
bedding material to a uniform grade so that piping rests upon a continuous and
uniform bedding.
2. Where excavation has been made below the required grade,the Contractor shall
provide,place and compact suitable bedding material to restore the proper grade
elevation.
F. Provide tracer wire over top of piping.
1. Construction:
a. Conductor: Solid or stranded copper per spec ASTM B-1, B-3, or B-8. I
b. Insulation: High Molecular Weight Polyethylene(HMWPE)ASTM D-1248.
Various insulation colors dependant on usage.
c. Temperature: 70 degrees C dry and wet. I
d. Voltage: 20 and 30 Mil=30 to 300 volts. 45 Mil=600 volts.
G. Backfilling: Upon acceptance of installed piping systems,trenches shall be backfilled in lifts.
Backfill material shall be placed and compacted in lifts not to exceed 6 inches in depth to a
height of 1 inch above the top of trench. Backfill shall be placed to obtain contact with the
entire periphery of the pipe without disturbing pipe placement.
H. Compaction: One of the following methods or combination thereof shall be required; 1)
Mechanical Tamper or Vibratory Compactor. Compaction shall be sufficient to attain 95%of
maximum density at optimum moisture content. Water "puddling" or"washing" is prohibited.
I. Bedding/Backfill Material: Where native material has been removed,necessary foundation
material consisting of 3/4 inch minus crushed rock or fill sand shall be placed and compacted
to form a firm base of the required thickness. Backfill material shall be the same. Follow the
pipe manufacturer's installation instructions when specified materials are specifically
prohibited.
3.05 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL ,
A. All removed equipment is the property of the Contractor unless indicated otherwise.
Disconnect and remove all such equipment from the property. Cap all piping in walls,below
floors, and/or above ceilings in finished rooms.
B. Where equipment is to be reused,reconnect piping,wiring and/or controls to allow this
equipment to function as it had prior to this renovation unless indicated otherwise.
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING
A. Provide all motor starters,control devices, and wiring complete from power source indicated
on Drawings.
B. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specifications, are based upon
requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several
makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a
complete and operable system controls for the actual selected equipment/system.
3.07 INSTALLATION 1
A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes and Regulations and good common
practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed
installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain recommended clearances for repair
and service to all equipment.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 8
22 00 00-BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
i
B. Anchorage: Anchor and/or brace all mechanical equipment,piping and ductwork to resist
displacement due to seismic action,include snubbers on equipment mounted on spring
isolators.
C. Where mounting heights or locations are not identified, install systems, equipment and
' materials to provide maximum headroom.
D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves,fittings,damper actuators,
etc. on pipe and duct systems.
E. Install systems,materials and equipment giving right of way to systems required to be installed
at a specific slope or operation by gravity.
F. Provide condensate drain piping to over nearest floor drain for all coils, furnaces,boilers,
domestic water heaters and the likes.
G. Flush clean and disinfect domestic water system.
H. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with stops,reducers,and
escutcheons.
I. Installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer,
including special requirements for seismic restraints.
J. Equipment Manufacturer's Responsibility and Services:
I1. A manufacturer's representative for major equipment and operating systems shall be
provided as necessary to assist the Contractor during installation, and to provide
written certification that the equipment has been installed as specified and in
accordance with the manufacturer's representative.
2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide the initial startup of equipment in the
presence of the Owner.
a. Provide a pre-start check of all piping, valves, control devices, control panels,
and equipment.
b. Calibrate and adjust equipment and controls for operation at the specified
design and conditions.
c. Provide a record of all startup events noting problems and their resolution.
d. Provide a record of all set points for operational controls and devices.
3. Upon the completion of the equipment startup,provide instructional time with the
Owner's personnel to review the operations and maintenance manuals and perform
each step necessary for startup, shutdown,troubleshooting,and routine maintenance.
The instructional time shall be scheduled through the Owner.
4. Upon completion of the inspections, startup,testing, and checkout procedures,the
equipment manufacturer shall submit written notice to the Owner that the units are
ready for use by the Owner. Provide a certificate of calibration for all equipment.
3.08 MOUNTING AND SHIMMING
A. Mount equipment as shown on the Drawings.
B. Level the equipment by means of 304 stainless steel wedges(stainless steel plates and stainless
steel shims)or PVC/poly wedges in areas of extreme corrosive environments. Wedge taper
shall not be greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing
surface for the equipment. Secure each pair of wedges in their final positions with one tack
weld on each side after leveling is complete. Wedging shall be executed in a manner that will
prevent a change in level or springing of the Baseplate when the anchor bolts are tightened.
I
' TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 8
22 00 00-BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
1. Adjust rotating equipment assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned,
plumb and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings.
2. All rotating equipment shall be checked for proper alignment with dial indicators or
laser after completion of grouting. The alignment must be within the tolerances
required by the equipment manufacturer. The final alignment check shall be
witnessed by the Owner. ,
3.09 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall inspect his work to ensure the installation and workmanship is in
accordance with these specifications and acceptable industry standards for the work being
done.
B. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the
Owner. Contractor shall correct any work,materials, or equipment not in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
3.10 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS '
A. All equipment shall be installed with suitable access clearances that satisfy OSHA and code
requirements for maintenance or removal of replaceable parts and components, and with
necessary inions or flanges to perform the maintenance or removal without removing the
connecting appurtenances.
B. Where equipment requiring periodic maintenance cannot be reached by normal walkways
because of interference with ductwork,piping, or other obstructions the Contractor shall notify
the Owner and propose an alternate safe means of access. These may include construction of
an overhead platform with stairway or ladder ends and safety railings or handholds, or
walk-through duct plenums with hinged access doors, or as required to meet OSHA standards
for safe maintenance procedures.
3.11 CLEANING, START-UP,AND ADJUSTING 1
A. The Contractors shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems,minor subsystems,
and services provided under this section. He shall coordinate start-up procedures, calibration,
and system checkout with all project managers. Any system operational problems shall be
diagnosed; all correctional procedures shall be initiated as required to bring out the system into
compliance with the design, and the problem then shall be rechecked to verify that the system
operates normally.
B. Thoroughly clean all parts of the installation at the completion of the work. The Contractor
shall clean up and remove from the premises all refuse material, crates, and rubbish arising
from his work. Remove, clean, and reinstall all filters. Belt-drive tensions and alignments
shall be checked. All motors and bearings shall be lubricated in accordance with the
manufacturer's service manuals prior to equipment start-up. Provide a lubrication schedule for
every item of equipment furnished under this section. The schedule shall include the type of
lubricant and the application frequency.
END OF SECTION 22 00 00
I
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 8 of 8
22 05 19-METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 05 19 -METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
B. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 10 05 -Plumbing Piping.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME B40.100-Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; 2013.
B. ASTM El - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers; 2014.
C. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 2014.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range,total range and location for
' manufactured components.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Section 01 70 00.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. for additional provisions.
' 2.
3. Supply two bottles of red gage oil for static pressure gages.
Supply two pressure gages with pulsation damper and two dial thermometers.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in,
taps,supports and test plugs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Weksler; Model 401: www.weksler-gauges.com.
2. Trerice;Model 700 Series: www.trerice.com.
3. Ametek(U.S. Gauge); Model Series 540: www.ametekusg.com.
4. Other approved manufacturers: Ashcroft, Marshalltown, Weiss.
' 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100,drawn steel case,phosphor bronze bourdon tube,rotary
brass movement,brass socket,with front recalibration adjustment,black scale on white
' background.
1. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
2. Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter.
3. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 4
22 05 19-METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
4. Scale: Psi and KPa.
2.02 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Weksler: www.weksler-gauges.com.
2. Trerice : www.trerice.com.
3. Ametek(U.S. Gauge): www.ametekusg.com.
4. Other approved manufacturers: Ashcroft, Marshalltown, Weiss.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. I
B. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle,brass for maximum 150 psi.
C. Ball Valve: Brass 1/4 inch NPT cock, for 200 psi. Lever handle.
1. Product: Al2 manufactured by Weksler,or approved equal.
D. Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for minimum 150 psi.
1. Product: BBV4 manufactured by Weksler.
E. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber,brass with 1/4 inch connections.
1. Product: WG41/WG42 manufactured by Weksler.
F. Syphon: Steel, Schedule 40, 1/4 inch angle or straight pattern. '
1. Product: A031 manufactured by Weksler.
2.03 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com.
2. Trerice; Model A00: www.trerice.com.
3. Ametek(U.S. Gauge);Model Fig. MN: www.ametekusg.com.
4. Other approved manufacturers: Ashcroft,Marshalltown,Weiss.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Thermometers -Fixed Mounting: Red-or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass; ASTM El;
lens front tube,cast aluminum case with enamel finish. 1111. Size: 9 inch scale.
2. Window: Clear glass.
3. Stem: 3/4 inch brass.
4. Accuracy: 2 percent,per ASTM E77.
5. Calibration: Degrees F and Degrees C.
C. Thermometers -Adjustable Angle: Red-or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass; ASTM
El; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint
with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane, 180 degrees in
vertical plane.
1. Size: 9 inch scale.
2. Window: Clear glass.
3. Stem: 3/4 inch NPT brass.
4. Accuracy: 2 percent,per ASTM E77.
5. Calibration: Degrees F and Degrees C.
2.04 DIAL THERMOMETERS I
A. Manufacturers:
1 Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 4
22 05 19-METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
I2. Trerice;Model B8560: www.trerice.com.
3. Ametek(U.S. Gauge); Model Series 6000: www.ametekusg.com.
1 4. Other approved manufacturers: Ashcroft,Marshalltown,Weiss.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
I
B. Thermometers-Adjustable Angle: Dial type bimetallic actuated;ASTM El; stainless steel
case,adjustable angle with front recalibration, silicone fluid damping,white with black
markings and black pointer,hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel stem.
1 1. Size: 5 inch diameter dial.
2. Lens:. Clear glass.
3. Accuracy: 1 percent.
I 4. Calibration: Degrees F and Degrees C.
2.05 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
I A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required,
and with cap and chain.
B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange,designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts,
I with brass perforated stem.
. EST PLUGS
I A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter
pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F.
B. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter
I pressure or temperature probe with Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F.
C. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter
pressure or temperature probe with Viton core for temperatures up to 400 degrees F.
I D. Test Kit: Carrying case,internally padded and fitted containing two 3-1/2 inch diameter
pressure gages,two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes,two 1 inch dial thermometers.
IPART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
IA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA M6.
IProvide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.
lir
I
C. Provide one pressure gage per pump,installing taps before strainers and on suction and
discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.
D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide needle valve to isolate each gage.
Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation.
E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller
than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from
insulation.
I F. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
G. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate
scale.
I
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 4
22 05 19-METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
thermometers in locations where theyare easilyread from normal operating
'
H. Install gages and
level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
I. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.
J. Locate test plugs adjacent to pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
3.02 SCHEDULES I
A. Pressure Gages,Location and Scale Range:
1. Pressure reducing valves, 0 to 30 psi.
2. Backflow preventers, 0 to 100 psi.
B. Stem Type Thermometers, Location and Scale Range:
1. Water zone supply and return,0 to 150 degrees F.
2. Domestic hot water supply and recirculation, 0 to 150 degrees F.
END OF SECTION 22 05 19
I
1
1
1
I
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 4
22 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe Markers.
' E. Ceiling tacks.
F. Labels.
G. Lockout devices.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating: Identification painting.
111 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2015.
B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
' A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical
identification.
' C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location,
function,and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
B. Safety Sign Company: www.safetysignco.com.
C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
' 1. Letter Color: Black.
2. Letter Height: 1/2 inch.
3. Background Color: Yellow.
' 4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.
' TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 3
22 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2.03 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth
edges. I
C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.04 STENCILS
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2
inch high letters.
2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch
high letters.
3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 '
inch high letters.
4. 8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2-1/2
inch high letters. '
5. Over 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch long color field, 3-1/2
inch high letters.
6. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters. '
B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 23, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to
ASME A13.1.
2.05 PIPE MARKERS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic,preformed to fit around '
pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification
of fluid being conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible,vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing
and printed markings.
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,
minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
2.06 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. Plumbing Valves: Green. '
2.07 LABELS
A. Description: Aluminum, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification.
2.08 LOCKOUT DEVICES
A. Lockout Hasps:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Anodized aluminum or reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface; size
minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 3
I22 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
B. Valve Lockout Devices:
1. Steel device preventing access to valve operator,accepting lock shackle.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
I3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply
with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
IB. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23.
ID. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
I
instructions.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above
buried pipe.
I G. Identify pumps,heat transfer equipment,tanks,and water treatment devices with 8 x 4 inch
plastic nameplates or 2 inch stencil painting. Small devices, such as in-line pumps,may be
identified with tags.
IH. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
I J. Identify piping,concealed or exposed,with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch
diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and
align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including
I
risers and drops,adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or
enclosure, and at each obstruction.
END OF SECTION 22 05 53
I
I
I
I
I
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 3
22 07 19-PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 22 07 19 -PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
' PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00 -Firestopping.
' B. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jacket.
C. Section 22 10 05 -Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
' 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.
' B. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007
(Reapproved 2013).
' C. ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).
D. ASTM C534/C534M- Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
' Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2014.
E. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015.
F. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with
' Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
G. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2015a.
H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product description,thermal characteristics, list of materials and
' thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
' in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification,product density, and
thickness.
' TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 4
22 07 19-PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
1
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. '
B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS '
2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, '
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Materials shall not contain pentabrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in amounts greater than
allowed by Oregon law.
2.02 GLASS FIBER
A. Manufacturers: ,
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation; Model "Micro-Lok": www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Insulation: ASTM C547 ; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K'value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C. Insulation: ASTM C547 ; semi-rigid,noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
1. 'K'value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn,bonded to aluminized film; 1
moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02
perm-inches.
E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. ,
F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
G. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195;hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: '
1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic,compatible with insulation,black color.
I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:
1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation,black color.
J. Outdoor Breather Mastic:
1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation,black color.
K. Insulating Cement:
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 4
I22 07 19-PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
I1. ASTM C449/C449M.
I 2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Manufacturer: _
1. Armacell LLC: www.armacell.us.
I
2. Halstead;Model"Insul-Tube".
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
I B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM
C534 Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.
I3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
2.04 JACKETS
IA. PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
Ib. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material,off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
I
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch,maximum,when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
I d. Thickness: 20 mil
e. 'Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
3. Covering Adhesive Mastic:
Ia. Compatible with insulation.
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
IB. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry,with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
IA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
1 C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including
fittings,valves,unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections,pump bodies, and expansion
Ijoints.
E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure
with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 4
22 07 19-PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC
fitting covers.
F. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets,with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or
field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure 1
sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. I
G. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation;may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating
material suitable for the planned temperature range.
H. Continue insulation through walls,sleeves,pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish
at supports,protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations,refer to Section 07 84 00.
Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
3.03 SCHEDULES '
A. Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Cold Water:
a. Glass Fiber,Rigid, Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: 1 inch and under.
2) Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3) Pipe Size Range: Over 1 inch.
4) Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Roof Drain Bodies: Flexible Duct Wrap with multi-purpose, foil-scrim-kraft jacket.
Use tie-wire to secure in place. Minimum thickness: 1 inch. 1113. Roof Drainage Within 10 Feet of the Exterior:
a. Glass Fiber, Rigid,Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.
2) Thickness: 1 inch.
4. Roof Drainage Run Horizontal at Roof Level:
a. Glass Fiber, Rigid, Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.
2) Thickness: 1 inch.
END OF SECTION 22 07 19 1
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 4
22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
' A. Pipe,pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Domestic water.
3. Valves.
4. Water pressure reducing valves.
5. Strainers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 23 16-Excavation.
B. Section 31 23 23 -Fill.
C. Section 07 84 00-Firestopping.
' D. Section 08 31 00 -Access Doors and Panels.
E. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating.
F. Section 22 05 16 -Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping.
G. Division 26-Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME B16.18 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.
B. ASME B 16.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013.
1 C. ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping; 2014.
D. ASME BPVC-IX-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX-Welding,Brazing, and
Fusing Qualifications; 2015.
E. ASTM B1 -Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire; 2007.
F. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2007.
' G. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.
' H. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).
I. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015a.
J. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014.
IK. ASTM D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire
and Cable; 2012.
' L. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC)Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
M. AWWA C651 -Disinfecting Water Mains; 2005.
N. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; 2011.
O. MSS SP-80-Bronze Gate, Globe,Angle and Check Valves; 2013.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 9
22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
1
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings,valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for '
this project,with design calculations for loadings and spacings.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Valve Repacking Kits: Two for each type and size of valve. ,
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with all applicable local codes and standards.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME(BPV IX) .
D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
E. Identify pipe with marking including size,ASTM material classification,ASTM specification,
water pressure rating. '
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable plumbing code.
B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
installation of backflow prevention devices. '
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. '
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Store pipe on sleepers, a
minimum of 4 inches above surrounding grade,at all times.
PART 2 PRODUCTS '
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING,WASTE(W)
PIPING ONLY
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301,hubless.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310,neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.
Mission Heavyweight, Husky 4000, Clamp-All 120 system,or approved.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 9
22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
' A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301,hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310,neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2.03 WATER PIPING,BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, annealed.
' 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper allow or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and
bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM: AWS A5.8,BCuP silver braze.
2.04 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88,Type L(B), Drawn(H).
' 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B 16.22,wrought copper and
bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel,threaded both ends,threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.
2.06 INSERTS
A. Manufacturers:
' 1.
2. Anvil Fig. 281.
PHD Fig 951.
3. Michigan Hanger Model 355EG.
' 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Inserts: Carbon steel case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection
with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to
' suit threaded hanger rods.
2.07 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls,Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
2.08 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
' A. Manufacturers:
1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. Model Series LS.
2. NMP Corporation.
' 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber
links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with
' bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened,providing
watertight seal and electrical insulation.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 9
22 10 05-PLUMBING PIPING
2.09 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Unistrut Model Series P1000.
2. Superstrut Model Series 1200.
3. Michigan Hanger"0-Strut"Model A-12.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
2.10 FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Specified Technology Inc. (STI)Model SpecSeal Series 100.
2. Dow Corning Corp.
3. Hilti Corp.
4. International Protective Coating Corp. '
5. 3M fire Protection Products.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as
required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one
type for each similar application. 1111. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or multiple component silicone
elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.
2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or Multiple component foam compound.
3. Foimulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound
mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.
4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber
stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.
5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible
fillers and silicone elastomer,covered with sheet stainless steel jacket,joined with I collars,penetration sealed with flanged stops.
6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to
surface heat gain.
7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. '
C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors.
2.11 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and
suitable for required fire ratings.
B. Dam Material: Permanent:
1. Mineral fiberboard.
2. Mineral fiber matting.
3. Sheet metal.
4. Plywood or particle board.
5. Alumina silicate fire board.
C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners,temporary stops or dams, and other
devices required to position and retain materials in place.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 9
1
22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
I
D. General:
1. Furnish UL listed products.
I 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
E. Non-Rated Surfaces:
I 1. Stamped steel,chrome plated,hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling
plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed.
2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to
I continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type
wall sleeve.
2.12 GATE VALVES
IA. Manufacturers:
1. Hammond Valve Co.; Model IB640/1B641: www.hammondvalve.com.
I
2.
3. Nibco, Inc.; Model T-111/T-131: www.nibco.com.
Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
4. Stockham; Model B-100/B-122: www.stockham.com.
I 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Up To and Including 3 Inches:
1. MSS SP-80, Class 150,bronze body,bronze trim,rising stem,threaded bonnet,
Ihandwheel,inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder or threaded ends.
2.13 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
I A. Manufacturers:
1. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
2. Cash-Acme: www.cashacme.com.
I
3. Zurn/Wilkins: www.zurn.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Up to 2 Inches:
I 1. MSS SP-80,bronze body,stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric
reinforced diaphragm,strainer,threaded single union ends.
C. Over 2 Inches:
I
1. MSS SP-85,cast iron body,bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc,
flanged.
I2.14 STRAINERS
2.15 STRAINERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.
I 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
4. Apollo: www.conbraco.com.
5. Stockham: www.stockham.com.
I
6.
7. Nibco, Inc.: www.nibco.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Size 2 inch and Under:
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 9
22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel I
perforated screen.
2. Class 150,threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel
I
perforated screen.
C. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch:
I
1. Class 125, flanged iron body,Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated
screen.
D. Size 5 inch and Larger: I 1. Class 125, flanged iron body,basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated
screen.
PART 3 EXECUTION I
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade,dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION I A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt,on inside and outside,before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
I
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to I walls.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
I
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or
connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 05 16. I G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of I access doors with Section 08 31 00.
I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 ft of cover.
J. Provide tracer wire over top of piping.
I
1. Construction:
a. Conductor: Solid or stranded copper per spec ASTM B-1, B-3, or B-8.
I
b. Insulation: High Molecular Weight Polyethylene(HMWPE)ASTM D-1248.
Various insulation colors dependant on usage.
c. Temperature: 70 degrees C dry and wet.
I
d. Voltage: 20 and 30 Mil=30 to 300 volts. 45 Mil=600 volts.
K. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 9
I
22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing,scrape,brush clean,
and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
M. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
N. Prepare exposed,unfinished pipe,fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
' Refer to Section 09 90 00.
0. Excavate in accordance with Section 31 23 16.
P. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 23.
Q. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
R. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal,not inverted.
S. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.
T. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
' U. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.
V. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions,walls and floors.
t W. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
' reinforced concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4
inches.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling,locate inserts flush with slab surface.
' 5. For pipe runs of 1 inch or less and ran high and tight to the structure,use Hubbard
Enterprises/Holdrite#121 or#125 Series Brackets in conjunction with Hubbard
Enterprises/Holdrite#260 or#400 Series Inserts or approved equal.
' 6. Where inserts are omitted,drill through concrete slab from below and provide
through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush
with slab.
X. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
' 2.
3. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
' 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
' connected horizontal piping.
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation,provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
I8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or sheet lead packing
between hanger or support and piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers
and supports located in crawl spaces,pipe shafts,and suspended ceiling spaces are not
considered exposed.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 9
22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation;refer to
Section 22 05 48.
11. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
12. Support of pipe tubing and equipment is to be accomplished by means of engineered
products specific to each application. Makeshift field devised methods will not be
allowed. 1
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to
pipe.
C. Install gate,ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment,part of systems, or '
vertical risers.
D. Install ball valves for throttling,bypass,or manual flow control services.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated I
and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope unless otherwise noted.
B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM '
A. Prior to starting work,verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali(caustic soda or soda
ash) or acid(hydrochloric).
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form,throughout system to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. '
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum
15 percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L,repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. '
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from
water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services. Before commencing work check invert
elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be 1
properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and
water meter with by-pass valves,pressure reducing valve,and sand strainer.
1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete
bridge. Calk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor
service main inside to concrete wall.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 8 of 9
22 10 05 -PLUMBING PIPING
2. Provide 18 gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch above
floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches of loose batt
insulation stuffing.
END OF SECTION 22 10 05
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
' TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 9 of 9
22 10 06-PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 10 06 -PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cleanouts.
B. Hydrants.
C. Backflow preventers.
D. Heat tracing(freeze protection).
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 10 05 -Plumbing Piping.
B. Division 16-Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities;Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.
B. ASME A112.6.3 -Floor and Trench Drains; 2001 (R2007).
C. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrant with Backflow Protection and
Freeze Resistance; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component sizes,rough-in requirements,service sizes, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions,weights,and placement of openings and holes.
D. Certificates: Certify that grease and oil interceptors meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate
assembly and support requirements.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts,backflow
preventers, and water hammer arrestors.
G. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.
H. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists,exploded assembly
views.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: Two.
3. Extra Hose End Vacuum Breakers for Hose Bibbs: Two.
4. Containers: Two.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with not less than three years documented experience.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 4
22 10 06-PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
I
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DRAINS I
A. Downspout Nozzles:
1. Manufacturers: I
a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model 1770: www.jayrsmith.com.
b. Watts Regulator Company: www.watts.com.
c. Wade: www.wadedrains.com. I
d. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com.
e. Sioux Chief: www.siouxchief.com.
f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2. Cast bronze body and wall flange round with offset bottom section.
B. Floor Drain(FD-1):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company;Model 2005-A/2005-B:
www.jayrsmith.com.
b. Watts Regulator Company: www.watts.com.
c. Wade: www.wadedrains.com.
d. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
e. Sioux Chief Finish Line; Model 833-NR/833-NQ: www.siouxchief.com.
f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange,
weep holes,reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. 1
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.
2. Watts Regulator Company: www.watts.com.
3. Wade: www.wadedrains.com. I
4. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com.
5. Sioux Chief Finish Line: www.siouxchief.com.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas(CO-1):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model 4250: www.jayrsmith.com.
b. Sioux Chief; Model 834-DNR: www.siouxchief.com.
2. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and brass non-skid cover.
C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-2):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model 4020: www.jayrsmith.com. I b. Sioux Chief; Model 834-DNR: www.siouxchief.com.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 4
22 10 06-PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
I2. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, threaded top assembly,and round
gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept
Ifloor finish in finished floor areas.
2.03 HYDRANTS
I A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com/ilsle.
2. Watts Regulator Company: www.watts.com.
I 3. Zurn Industries, Inc.: www.zurn.com.
4. Woodford Manufacturing Co.: www.woodfordmfg.com/Woodford
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
IB. Wall Hydrants:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Woodford Manufacturing Co.; Model B67C:
Iwww.woodfordmfg.com/Woodford
b. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Model Z-1320-C: www.zurn.com.
2. ASSE 1019; freeze resistant, self-draining type with polished bronze wall plate hose
Ithread spout,lockshield and removable key,and integral vacuum breaker.
2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
I A. Manufacturers:
1. Febco: www.febcoonline.com.
2. Zurn Industries,LLC: www.zurn.com.
1 3. Apollo Valves: www.apollovalves.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
I B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
1. ASSE 1013;bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs;two
independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential
pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under
Iback pressure in case of diaphragm failure;non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with
two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
I 2.05 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Febco: www.febcoonline.com.
2. Zurn Industries,LLC: www.zurn.com.
3. Apollo Valves: www.apollovalves.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
IB. Double Check Valve Assemblies:
1. ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel
I springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric
vent.
2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
IA. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model Hydrotol: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.
I
2. Zurn Industries,LLC: www.zurn.com.
1 TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 4
22 10 06-PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
3. MIFAB Inc.: www.mifab.com
4. Precision Plumbing Products,Inc.: www.ppcinc.net.
5. Sioux Chief: www.siouxchief.com.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. Stainless steel construction,bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201,
precharged suitable for operation in temperature range minus 100 to 300 degrees F and
maximum 250 psi working pressure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION I
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage
system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of
domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines,janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems,
premise isolation,irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs.
F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water
supply piping to lavatories, sinks, and washing machine outlets.
H. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures111
(each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18
inches long.
END OF SECTION 22 10 06 I
1
I
I
I
1
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 4
22 30 00-PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
ISECTION 22 30 00 -PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
IPART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
IA. Water Heaters.
B. Water heaters.
I1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 05 48 -Vibration Isolation and Sound and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping.
I B. Division 26: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
I A. ANSI Z21.10.1 -Gas Water Heaters-Volume I- Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of
75,000 Btu per Hour or Less; 2014.
B. ANSI Z21.10.3 -Gas-Fired Water Heaters-Volume III- Storage Water Heaters with Input
I Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous; 2015.
C. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 -Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,Division 1 -Rules for
Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2017.
I D. UL 174- Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
I 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B.' Product Data:
I1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections
to other equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type, capacity,power requirements.
I3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump
and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
I C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate heat exchanger dimensions,size of tappings, and performance data.
2. Indicate dimensions of tanks,tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,
I tappings,and drains.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation,maintenance, and inspection data,
Ireplacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
IG. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
I 2. Extra Pump Seals: Two of each type and size.
3. Extra Water Softener Salt: 50 pounds.
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 3
22 30 00-PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
I
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section,with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name,model number, and rating/capacity
identified by permanently attached label. I
C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor
binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation,operate within
25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
1.06 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Water Heaters: NSF approved. I
B. Gas Water Heaters: Certified by CSA International to 1 or 2, as applicable,in addition to
requirements specified elsewhere.
C. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174.
D. Water Tanks: ASME labeled,to ASME(BPV VIII, 1).
E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories I
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters,water storage tanks,
packaged water heating systems, in-line circulator, submersible sump pumps,sump pumps, I
and sewage ejectors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS
A. A.O. Smith Water Products Co: www.hotwater.com. I
B. Bradford-White: www.bradfordwhite.com.
C. Rheem Manufacturing Company: www.rheem.com.
111
D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2.02 HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS FIRED WATER HEATER: WH-1
A. Manufacturers:
1. A.O. Smith Water Products Co; Model Cyclone Xi: www.hotwater.com
2. Bradford-White; Model EF: "eForce": www.bradfordwhite.com.
3. State Industries; Model Ultra Force: www.statewaterheaters.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Type: Automatic,natural gas-fired,vertical storage. I
C. Capacity:
1. As indicated on the Drawing schedules.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 3
111
22 30 00-PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
I2. Certification:ANSI Z21.10.3.
Tank: Glass lined welded steel ASME labeled;multiple flue passages,4 inch diameter
ID.
inspection port,thermally insulated with minimum 3 inches foam,encased in
corrosion-resistant steel jacket;baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs.
I E. Accessories: Provide NSF approved stand for kitchen applications and the following:
1. Water Connections: Brass.
2. Dip tube: Brass
I
3.
4. Drain valve.
Anode: Magnesium.
5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME labelled.
IF. Approval: By AGA as automatic storage water heater and for operation at 180 degrees F.
G. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with temperature range adjustable from 120 to 180
degrees F. Automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat factory set at 140 degrees F,
I
gas pressure regulator,turbulent jet sealed combustion burner with direct venting with PVC or
CPVC piping,electronic ignition, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple,
automatic flue damper and draft hood
1 2.03 INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS: WH-1,2
A. Manufacturers:
Il. EE Max Model SP.
2. Bradford-White.
3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
IB. Type: Automatic, electric-fired, instantaneous.
C. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve,magnesium anode, and
I ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. Provide NSF approved stand for kitchen
applications.
D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with adjustable temperature range from 120 to 180
Idegrees F. Automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat factory set at 140 degrees F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
I3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by
I code,and complying with conditions of certification, if any.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping,gas venting, and electrical work to
achieve operating system.
IEND OF SECTION 22 30 00
I
I
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 3
23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
' A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for all Contractor installed equipment. It applies
to all sections included in Division 15. The requirements herein are an expansion upon the
requirements of Division 1.
B. Provide all materials, labor and equipment required to install complete and fully operational
HVAC systems as indicated by the contract drawings and this specification.
C. Obtain and pay for all permits,licenses, fees and taxes applicable to this project as required by
law.
D. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information required for installation
and operation of mechanical items.
E. Requirements for the following are included:
1. Related work(other Contract Documents and specification sections)that must be
combined with the requirements of this Section.
2. Design performance.
3. Delivery, storage,and handling.
' 4. Quality assurance and standards.
5. Submittals.
6. Product quality,basic type, and finishes.
7. Equipment identification.
8. Design criteria.
9. Excavation and backfill.
10. Installation.
11. Mounting and shimming.
12. Inspection.
13. Safety considerations.
14. Cleaning, startup, and adjustments.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and
related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for the project equipment and
systems:
1. Division I sections included in this Project specifications.
2. The Contract.
3. -------General and specific mechanical specifications and drawings included in the project.
4. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Indicated":Refers to graphic representations,notes or schedules in the Drawings; or to other
paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents.
1. Terms such as"shown", "noted","scheduled", and"specified", are used to notify or
help the user to locate reference. Location is not limited.
t
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 9
23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
B. "Directed": Terms such as"directed", Requested","authorized","selected", "approved",
q pp
"required", and"permitted"mean directed by Architect/Engineer, approved by
Architect/Engineer and similar phrases.
C. "Approved": When used in conjunction with Architect/Engineer's action on contract
submittals,applications,requests, is limited to Architect/Engineer's duties and responsibilities
as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
D. "Regulations": Includes laws, ordinances, statutes and lawful orders issued by authorities
having jurisdiction, as well as rules,conventions and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of Work.
E. "Furnish": Means to supply and deliver to the Project site,ready for unloading,unpacking,
assembly, installation and similar operations.
F. "Install": Describes operations at Project site including actual unloading,temporary storage,
unpacking, assembling, erecting,placing,anchoring,supporting, isolating, applying,working
to dimension, finishing,curing,protecting, cleaning and similar operations. I
G. "Provide": Means to furnish and install.
H. "Installer": A contractor,or another entity engaged by the contractor, either as an employee,
subcontractor, or contractor of a lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity
including installation, erection, application or similar operations.
1. Installers are required to be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform.
2. The term"experience"means having successfully completed a minimum of three
previous projects similar in scope and size to this Project and within the time frame
indicated in the"Quality Assurance" section of the Specifications. In addition, in
means being familiar with special requirements indicated and having complied with111
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. "Project Site": Is defined as the space available to the Contractor for performing construction
activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of
Project.
1.04 DESIGN PERFORMANCE I
A. Compliance by the Contractor and/or Vendor with the provisions of this Specification does not
relieve him of the responsibilities of furnishing equipment and materials of proper design,
mechanically suited to meet operating guarantees at the specified service conditions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit complete sets of manufacturer's product data in .PDF format for I
approval. Literature submitted shall clearly indicate the model number, capacity,rated
operating conditions, noise levels, size,weight, support requirements,rough-in data and
dimensions, electrical power requirements,wiring diagrams,utility(fuel,air, cooling water,
etc.)requirements, and options furnished. Submittals shall include,but are not necessarily
limited to the following;
1. HVAC: Air handling units; fans;piping; valves; supports and anchors; louvers;
grilles; diffusers; controls and the like.
2. Calculations: Provide for sizing of all seismic restraints and all other calculations
consistent with good engineering practice. Include design criteria used and
assumptions made.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 9
I23,00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit three complete sets of manufacturer's literature
bound in a three ring binder for approval. Data shall include installation,start-up, and
Imaintenance instructions,parts lists,and wiring diagrams.
C. Substitutions: System design was based upon the equipment and materials listed on the
I drawings and specifications herein.At contractor's option,another manufacturer's equipment
of similar quality,capacity and features may be submitted for prior approval per Section
01600. Prior permission to substitute does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of
including this information in the bound submittal packages.
ID. Air Balancing Report: Provide five written reports stating the design air and hydronic flow
requirements per, air inlet and air outlet and the final adjusted airflow volume for the same.
I1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes,standards and
I specifications,except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. State of Oregon"IBC".
2. State of Oregon"IMC".
3. State of Oregon"UPC".
4. State of Oregon"IFC".'
5. ANSUASHRAE 90-"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings...."
I 6. ANSUASHRAE 62 -"Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality."
7. NEBB -"Procedural Standard for Testing,Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems."
III 8. ANSI B31.9 "Building Service Piping".
9. SMACNA-"HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
10. NFPA-Sections 13, 54 and 90B.
I B. Drawings: All drawings are diagrammatic and show general design,arrangement, and extent
of the systems. Do not scale drawings for rough-in dimensions,nor use as shop drawings.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work required with a
Iminimum of five years documented experience.
D. Contractor shall furnish and install all work in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations and instructions.
1 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Delivery: Deliver to site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
IB. Preparation for shipment:
1. Each unit shall be suitably prepared for the shipment specified and for storage in
I accordance with manufacturer's instructions in a manner requiring no disassembly
prior to operation.
2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of the Preparation for
Shipment provisions employed with respect to materials and application.
1 3. One complete set of Installations,Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be
packed and shipped with the equipment. This set is in addition to the sets that are to
be sent directly to the Owner.
IC. Handling: Avoid damage. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction requirements
for rigging,unloading and transporting units.
I
1 TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 9
23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
D. Storage: Insideprotected from weather,dirt and construction dust.Where necessaryto store
g
outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable,waterproof wrapping. Cap all pipe
ends. Taping pipe ends is not adequate or allowable. I
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide I
products with the proper power characteristics and similar adaptations for the project.
B. Arrangement: Arrange ductwork and piping parallel with primary lines of the building
construction and with a minimum 7 feet overhead clearance in unfinished equipment rooms
where possible. Conceal all piping and ductwork where possible unless indicated otherwise.
Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access for operation and
maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping which must be sloped for drainage. Set all equipment
level or as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Coordination: Where several elements of the work must be sequenced and positioned in order
to fit the available space,prepare shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions(at111
accurate scale) required for installation and submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of
any of the elements involved in the coordination.
1.09 STANDARDS
A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in
successful operation for a minimum of five years. Provide materials of comparable quality I
omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated
capacities,minus 5%to plus 10% as approved in each case.
B. Governing Standards: The following are typical standards generally referenced in these I
specifications and identified by their acronym. Federal Specifications (FS),American Society
for Testing Materials (ASTM),American National Standards Institute(ANSI),Manufacturer's
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Standard Practice(MSS SP-69), 1
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute(CISPI),Underwriters Laboratory(UL)numbers are given.
1.10 WARRANTIES
A. Contractor shall provide a 1 year warranty on all equipment, materials and workmanship for a
period of one year from the date of owner's acceptance.
B. Provide five year warranty on all refrigeration compressors. I
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one set of spare filters for each furnace unit. I
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION I
A. Site Examination: Before starting work,carefully examine site and all Contract Drawings.
Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all
indicated elevations,building measurements,rough-in dimensions and equipment locations
before proceeding with any work.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 9
23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
B. UtilityLocations: The location of all utilities,wires, conduits,pipes,ducts,or other service
pP ,
facilities are shown in a general way only on the drawings and in some instances are taken
I
from existing drawings.Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on
the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to ,
commencing installation.
IC. Discrepancies: Any error,conflict or discrepancy in Drawings, Specifications and/or existing
conditions shall be reported immediately. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work
I until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-routing of piping or
ductwork be necessary,provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular
portion of the work.Under no circumstances shall beams,girders, footings or columns be cut
I for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on
Drawings.
D. The Contractor shall cooperate with others to avoid interferences and delays in the
I construction work.
E. Interference as a result of poor coordination or lack of cooperation with other trades shall be
corrected at the Contractor's expense.
I3.02 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES
A. Existing water,power,heat,ventilation, air conditioning and other services shall remain in
service during new construction work. Coordinate any interruption in service during new
I construction work. Coordinate any interruption of these services with the Owner's
representative a minimum of twenty-four(24)hours in advance.
I B. Protect from damage active utilities existing and evident by reasonable inspection of the site
whether shown or not on the Drawings. Protect,relocate or abandon utilities encountered in
the work which were not shown on the Drawings or evident by inspection of the work as
directed by the Architect.Maintain continuity of all utility services to existing buildings.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
111 A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1.
B. Protection: During cutting and patching,protect adjacent installations. Provide temporary
barriers to prevent the spread of dust and dirt outside of the immediate work area.
I C. Repair: Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials to match the
existing.
D. Inspection: Upon written direction from the Architect,uncover and restore work to provide for
Iobservation of concealed work.
3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
I A. General: Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for the installation of
mechanical work. Any piping or other work damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be
repaired at the Contractor's expense.
I B. Water: Keep all excavations free of standing water. Excavations damaged or softened by
water or frost shall be re-excavated and filled back to original level with approved material at
the Contractor's expense.
IC. Test: During the progress of the work for compacted fill,the Owner reserves the right to
request compaction tests made under the direction of a testing laboratory.
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 9
23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
necessarydepth and width,removingrocks,
Trench Excavation: Excavate trenches to the p
unstable soil (silt,peat, etc.)roots and stumps. Width of trench shall be adequate for proper
installation of piping or conduit. I
E. Foundation and Bedding:
1. Proper preparation of foundation,placement of foundation material where required,
and placement of bedding material shall precede the installation of the pipe. This shall
include leveling of the trench bottom as well as placement and compaction of required
bedding material to a uniform grade so that piping rests upon a continuous and
unifotiu bedding.
2. Where excavation has been made below the required grade,the Contractor shall
provide,place and compact suitable bedding material to restore the proper grade
elevation.
F. Provide tracer wire over top of piping.
1. Construction:
a. Conductor: Solid or stranded copper per spec ASTM B-1, B-3, or B-8.
b. Insulation: High Molecular Weight Polyethylene(HMWPE)ASTM D-1248.
Various insulation colors dependant on usage.
c. Temperature: 70 degrees C dry and wet.
d. Voltage: 20 and 30 Mil=30 to 300 volts. 45 Mil=600 volts.
G. Backfilling: Upon acceptance of installed piping systems,trenches shall be backfilled in lifts.
Backfill material shall be placed and compacted in lifts not to exceed 6 inches in depth to a
height of 1 inch above the top of trench. Backfill shall be placed to obtain contact with the
entire periphery of the pipe without disturbing pipe placement.
H. Compaction: One of the following methods or combination thereof shall be required; 1)
Mechanical Tamper or Vibratory Compactor. Compaction shall be sufficient to attain 95% of
maximum density at optimum moisture content. Water"puddling" or "washing" is prohibited.
I. Bedding/Backfill Material: Where native material has been removed,necessary foundation
material consisting of 3/4 inch minus crushed rock or fill sand shall be placed and compacted
to form a firm base of the required thickness. Backfill material shall be the same. Follow the
pipe manufacturer's installation instructions when specified materials are specifically
prohibited.
3.05 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL ,
A. All removed equipment is the property of the Contractor unless indicated otherwise.
Disconnect and remove all such equipment from the property. Cap all piping in walls,below
floors, and/or above ceilings in finished rooms.
B. Where equipment is to be reused,reconnect piping,wiring and/or controls to allow this
equipment to function as it had prior to this renovation unless indicated otherwise. I
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING
A. Provide all motor starters,control devices, and wiring complete from power source indicated
on Drawings.
B. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specifications, are based upon
requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several
makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a
complete and operable system controls for the actual selected equipment/system.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 9
23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
I
3.07 INSTALLATION
A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes and Regulations and good common
practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed
installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain recommended clearances for repair
and service to all equipment.
B. Anchorage: Anchor and/or brace all mechanical equipment,piping and ductwork to resist
displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on equipment mounted on spring
isolators.
C. Where mounting heights or locations are not identified, install systems, equipment and
materials to provide maximum headroom.
D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves,fittings,damper actuators,
etc. on pipe and duct systems.
E. Install systems,materials and equipment giving right of way to systems required to be installed
at a specific slope or operation by gravity.
F. Provide condensate drain piping to over nearest floor drain for all coils, furnaces,boilers,
domestic water heaters and the likes.
G. Provide all sheaves required for final air balance. Contractor shall not make assumptions or
exceptions concerning the number of sheave replacements or adjustments necessary to meet
the design requirements.Balance all HVAC systems to provide the amount of air indicated at
each diffuser, grille or register.
H. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place,bearings
lubricated,and the fan has been test run under observation. Fans shall not be used during
construction unless specifically authorized by the Owner and reviewed by the Engineer.
I. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers,grilles, and registers,regardless of
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser,grille, or register assembly.
J. Installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer,
including special requirements for seismic restraints.
K. Equipment Manufacturer's Responsibility and Services:
1. A manufacturer's representative for major equipment and operating systems shall be
provided as necessary to assist the Contractor during installation,and to provide
written certification that the equipment has been installed as specified and in
accordance with the manufacturer's representative.
2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide the initial startup of equipment in the
presence of the Owner.
a. Provide a pre-start check of all piping,valves, control devices, control panels,
and equipment.
b. Calibrate and adjust equipment and controls for operation at the specified
design and conditions.
' c.
d. Provide a record of all startup events noting problems and their resolution.
Provide a record of all set points for operational controls and devices.
3. Upon the completion of the equipment startup,provide instructional time with the
Owner's personnel to review the operations and maintenance manuals and perform
each step necessary for startup, shutdown,troubleshooting,and routine maintenance.
The instructional time shall be scheduled through the Owner.
' TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 9
23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
4. Upon completion of the inspections, startup,testing, and checkout procedures,the
equipment manufacturer shall submit written notice to the Owner that the units are
ready for use by the Owner. Provide a certificate of calibration for all equipment. I
3.08 MOUNTING AND SHIMMING
A. Mount equipment as shown on the Drawings.
B. Level the equipment by means of 304 stainless steel wedges (stainless steel plates and stainless
steel shims)or PVC/poly wedges in areas of extreme corrosive environments. Wedge taper
shall not be greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing
surface for the equipment. Secure each pair of wedges in their final positions with one tack
weld on each side after leveling is complete. Wedging shall be executed in a manner that will
prevent a change in level or springing of the Baseplate when the anchor bolts are tightened.
1. Adjust rotating equipment assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned,
plumb and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings.
2. All rotating equipment shall be checked for proper alignment with dial indicators or
111
laser after completion of grouting. The alignment must be within the tolerances
required by the equipment manufacturer. The final alignment check shall be
witnessed by the Owner.
3.09 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall inspect his work to ensure the installation and workmanship is in
accordance with these specifications and acceptable industry standards for the work being
done.
B. All materials, equipment,and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the
Owner. Contractor shall correct any work,materials, or equipment not in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
3.10 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 1
A. All equipment shall be installed with suitable access clearances that satisfy OSHA and code
requirements for maintenance or removal of replaceable parts and components, and with
necessary inions or flanges to perform the maintenance or removal without removing the
connecting appurtenances.
B. Where equipment requiring periodic maintenance cannot be reached by normal walkways
because of interference with ductwork,piping,or other obstructions the Contractor shall notify
the Owner and propose an alternate safe means of access. These may include construction of
an overhead platform with stairway or ladder ends and safety railings or handholds, or '
walk-through duct plenums with hinged access doors,or as required to meet OSHA standards
for safe maintenance procedures.
3.11 CLEANING, START-UP, AND ADJUSTING ,
A. The Contractors shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems,minor subsystems,
and services provided under this section. He shall coordinate start-up procedures, calibration,
and system checkout with all project managers. Any system operational problems shall be
diagnosed; all correctional procedures shall be initiated as required to bring out the system into
compliance with the design, and the problem then shall be rechecked to verify that the system
operates normally.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 8 of 9
23 00 00-BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
B. Thoroughly clean all parts of the installation on at the completion of the work. The Contractor
shall clean up and remove from the premises all refuse material,crates,and rubbish arising
from his work. Remove,clean, and reinstall all filters. Belt-drive tensions and alignments
shall be checked. All motors and bearings shall be lubricated in accordance with the
manufacturer's service manuals prior to equipment start-up. Provide a lubrication schedule for
every item of equipment furnished under this section. The schedule shall include the type of
lubricant and the application frequency.
END OF SECTION 23 00 00
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 9 of 9
I23 05 49-HVAC SEISMIC RESTRAINT
ISECTION 23 05 49 -HVAC SEISMIC RESTRAINT
IPART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
IA. Seismic restraint of equipment,piping and ductwork.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
IA. Section 23 00 00-Basic HVAC Requirements.
B. Section 23 05 48 -Vibration Isolation and Sound and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment.
IC. Section 23 31 00-HVAC Ducts and Casings.
D. Section 237412-Packaged Outdoor Rooftop Units -Small Capacity.
I1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Seismic Restraints:
I 1. The Anchorage and/or seismic restraint of permanent equipment and associated
systems listed below shall be designed to resist the total design seismic forces
prescribed in the latest edition of the International Building Code.
I a. All floor or roof-mounted equipment weighing 400 lbs. or greater.
b. All suspended or wall-mounted equipment weighing 20 lbs. or greater.
c. All vibration-isolated equipment weighing 20 lbs. or greater.
I d. All piping 1 1/4 inches nominal diameter and larger located in boiler,
mechanical equipment and refrigeration mechanical rooms.
e. All piping 2 1/2" inches nominal diameter and larger.
f. All ductwork 6 square feet and larger in cross sectional area.
g. All round ductwork 28 inches in diameter and larger.
h. Pipes,electrical conduit and ducts supported by a trapeze where none of those
I elements would individually require bracing,require bracing when the
combined operating weight of all elements supported by the trapeze is 10
lbs/ft or greater.
I B. All calculations shall be in accordance with Chapter 16 of the latest edition of the International
Building Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
IA. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00:
f 1. All anchorage and seismic restraints shall be designed and stamped by a professional
I engineer licensed in the state of the project location. Design shall include:
a. Number, size and location of anchors for floor or roof-mounted equipment. AM
For curb-mounted equipment,provide design of attachment of both the unit to
the curb and the curb to the structure. In addition,provide calculations or test
Idata verifying the curb can accept the seismic loads.
b. Number, size and location of seismic restraint devices and anchors for
vibration-isolated and suspended equipment. Provide calculations or test data
Iverifying the horizontal and vertical ratings of the seismic restraint devices.
c. Number, size and location of braces and anchors for suspended piping and
ductwork on shop drawings. In addition:
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 5
23 05 49-HVAC SEISMIC RESTRAINT
1) The contractor must select a single seismic restraint system
pre-designed to meet the requirements of the latest edition of the
International Building Code such as the 2011 Mason Industries
Seismic Restraint Guidelines for Suspended Piping,Ductwork,
Electrical Systems and floor and roof mounted equipment.
2) Details or designs from separate seismic restraint guidelines are not
acceptable. Installations not addressed by the selected system must be
designed, detailed and submitted along with the shop drawings.
3) Maximum seismic loads shall be indicated on drawings at each brace
location. Drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the
registered professional engineer licensed in the state of the project
location who designed the layout of the braces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS I
A. Amber Booth.
B. Mason Industries, Inc.
C. Kinetics Corporation.
D. Vibrex.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Seismic restraints shall be provided for all equipment,both supported and suspended,
piping and ductwork as listed above.
2. Bracing of piping and ductwork shall be in accordance with provisions set forth in
SMACNA seismic restraint manual.
3. Structural requirements for restraints, including their attachment to building structure,
shall be reviewed and approved by the structural engineer.
4. Attachments to supported or suspended equipment must be coordinated with the
equipment manufacturer.
B. Supported Equipment Products:
1. Seismic restraints shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock
absorbent neoprene materials compounded to bridge bearing specifications as
previously noted in paragraph 1.3. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and be a
minimum 3/4-inch thick. Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between
hard and resilient material of not less than 1/8-inch,nor more than 1/4-inch. Type 1 -
Seismic Snubbers: All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel
members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing
neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 inch thick. A minimum
air gap of 1/8 inch shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before
contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be
removable to allow inspection of internal clearances. The snubber shall be designed to
accept horizontal and vertical seismic loads as defined in Section 1.03.B. Mason Type
Z-1225 or Z-1011.
t
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 5
23 05 49-HVAC SEISMIC RESTRAINT
2. Each snubber shall be capable of restraint in all three mutually orthogonal directions.
Type 2-Seismic Sway Braces- Seismic sway braces shall consist of galvanized steel
I aircraft cables or steel angles/channels. Cables braces shall be designed to resist
seismic tension loads and steel braces shall be designed to resist both tension and
compression loads with a minimum safety factor of 2. Brace end connections shall be
I steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle. Do not mix cable and steel
braces to brace the same system or equipment. Steel angles,when required, shall be
clamped to the threaded hanger rods at the seismic sway brace locations utilizing a
I minimum of two ductile iron clamps. Sway braces shall be designed to accept
horizontal and vertical seismic loads as defined in Section 1.03.B. Mason Type SCB,
SSB, SRC and UC.
I 3. Submittals shall include load versus deflection curves up to 1/2-inch on the x,y and z
planes.
4. Mason Model Z-1011
I C. Bracing of Pipes:
1. Provide seismic bracing of all piping as detailed below. (Exception: Piping
suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length, as measured from the top
I of the pipe to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached,need not be
braced).
a. Brace all gas piping.
lb. Brace all piping located in boiler rooms,mechanical equipment rooms,and
refrigeration mechanical rooms that is 1-1/4-inch nominal diameter and
larger.
I 2. c. Brace all pipes 2-1/2-inch nominal diameter and larger.
For all gas piping, as specified in 1(a)the bracing details, schedules, and notes may be
used, except that transverse bracing shall be at 20 feet maximum, and longitudinal
I 3. bracing shall be at 40 feet maximum.
Seismic braces for pipes on trapeze hangers may be used.
4. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic joints or
I expansion joints or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with vibration
isolators. For threaded piping,the flexibility may be provided by the installation of
swing joints.
I 5. Cast iron pipe of all types,glass pipe,and any other pipe jointed with a shield and
clamp assembly,where the top of the pipe is 12 inches or more from the supporting
structure, shall be braced on each side of a change in direction of 90 degrees or more.
I 6. Riser joints shall be braced or stabilized between floors.
Vertical risers shall be laterally supported with a riser clamp at each floor. For
buildings greater than six stories high,all risers shall be engineered individually.
I D. Bracing of Ductwork:
1. Brace rectangular ducts with cross sectional areas of 6 square feet and larger. Brace
flat oval ducts in the same manner as rectangular ducts. Brace round ducts with
I diameters of 28 inches and larger. Brace flat oval ducts the same as rectangular ducts
of the same nominal size(Exception: No bracing is required if the duct is suspended
by hangers 12 inches or less in length,as measured from the top of the duct to the
I 2. bottom of the support where the hanger is attached).
Transverse bracing shall occur at the interval specified in the SMACNA tables or at
both ends if the duct run is less than the specified interval. Transverse bracing shall be
I
•
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 5
23 05 49-HVAC SEISMIC RESTRAINT
installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run,with a minimum of one brace
at each end.
3. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at the interval specified in the SMACNA tables with
at least one brace per duct run. Transverse bracing for one duct section may also act
as longitudinal bracing for a duct section connected perpendicular to it if the bracing is
installed within four feet of the intersection of the ducts and if the bracing is sized for
the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards.
E. Suspended Equipment and Piping and Ductwork:
1. Cable Method: The seismic restraint shall consist of a combination of stranded steel
aircraft cable and the specified vibration isolation hanger with an added nut and
neoprene and steel washer. The cable resists lateral and downward motion. The
modified vibration hanger resists upward motion.
2. Cable attachment details, cable size, and the neoprene and steel washers shall be sized
by the manufacturer and are to be indicated in the Shop Drawings.
3. Provide detailed Shop Drawings for approval in sufficient time to allow structural
attachment work to be incorporated into the normal work sequence.
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3.01 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. General:
1. Install and adjust seismic restraints so that the equipment,piping, and ductwork
supports are not degraded by the restraints.
2. Restraints must not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit objectionable
vibration or noise.
B. Supported Equipment:
1. Each vibration isolation frame for supported equipment shall have a minimum of four I
seismic snubbers mounted as close as possible to the vibration isolators and/or the
frame extremities.
2. Care must be taken so that a minimum 1/8-inch air gap in the seismic restraint snubber '
is preserved on all sides in order that the vibration isolation potential of the isolator is
not compromised. This requires that the final snubber adjustment be completed after
the vibration isolators are properly installed and the installation approved.
C. Bracing of Pipes:
1. Branch lines may not be used to brace main lines.
2. Transverse bracing shall be at 40 feet maximum except where a lesser spacing is
indicated in the SMACNA tables for bracing of pipes.
3. Longitudinal bracing shall be at 80 feet maximum except where a lesser spacing is
indicated in the tables. In pipes where thermal expansion is a consideration, an anchor I
point may be used as the specified longitudinal brace provided that it has a capacity
equal to or greater than a longitudinal brace. The longitudinal braces and connections
must be capable of resisting the additional force induced by expansion and
contraction.
4. A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of the building or to two
dissimilar building systems that may respond differently during an earthquake.
5. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for a pipe
section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the bracing is installed within
24 inches of the elbow or tee.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 5
23 05 49-HVAC SEISMIC RESTRAINT
D. Bracingof Ductwork:
1. Hangers must be positively attached to the duct within 2 inches of the top of the duct
with a minimum of two#10 sheet metal screws.
2. Group of ducts may be combined in larger frame so that the combined weights and
dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum weight and dimensions
of the duct for which bracing details are selected.
3. Walls, including gypsum board nonbearing partitions,which have ducts running
' through them,may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide solid blocking around
duct penetrations at stud wall construction.
4. Unbraced ducts shall be installed with a 6-inch minimum clearance to vertical ceiling
hanger wires.
E. Suspended Equipment, Piping,and Ductwork Cable Method:
1. Cables shall be adjusted to a degree of slackness approved by the Structural Engineer.
2. Uplift and downward restraint nuts and washers for the Type HST hangers shall be
adjusted so that there is a minimum 1/4-inch clearance.
END OF SECTION 23 05 49
I
1
1
I
I
i
t
I
r
' TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 5
23 07 13 -DUCT INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 13 -DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Duct insulation.
B. Duct Liner.
' C. Insulation jackets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00 -Firestopping.
B. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jackets.
C. Section 22 05 53 -Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
D. Section 23 05 53 -Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
E. Section 23 31 00-HVAC Ducts and Casings: Glass mineral wool ducts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B209 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
I 2014.
B. ASTM B209M- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2014.
C. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus;2010.
D. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013.
E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
1112014.
F. ASTM C916-Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 2014.
G. ASTM C1071 -Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation(Thermal and
' Sound Absorbing Material); 2012.
H. ASTM C 1338 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2010.
' I. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2015a.
J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.
K. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials
to Fungi; 2015.
L. SMACNA(DCS)-HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.
M. American Society of Heating,Refrigerating,and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE).
N. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association(NAIMA).
O. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA).
P. Underwriter's Laboratories(UL Environment).
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 7
23 07 13 -DUCT INSULATION
Q.
Underwriter's Laboratories Environmental(UL Environment).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product description,thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable
workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in
this section.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials,UL/ULC Classified per
UL 723 or meeting ASTM E 84,by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic,tapes,
and cement material containers,with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
D. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of
50 or less. I
E. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of
150 or less.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness. I
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt,water,chemical, and mechanical
damage,by storing in original wrapping.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements. 1
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
1.08 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity(K value): Units of Btu-inch/hour per square foot per degree F.
B. ASJ+: All Service Jacket composed of aluminum foil reinforced with glass scrim bonded to a
kraft paper interleaving with an outer film layer leaving no paper exposed.
•
C. ASJ: All Service Jacket(no outer film).
D. SSL+: Self-Sealing Lap with Advanced Closure System. '
E. SSL: Self-Sealing Lap.
F. FSK: Foil Scrim Kraft;jacketing.
G. PSK: Poly Scrim Kraft;jacketing.
H. PVC: PolyVinyl Chloride.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 7
23 07 13 -DUCT INSULATION
Glass Mineral Wool: Interchangeable with fiber glass,but replacing the term in the attempt to
' disassociate and differentiate Glass Mineral Wool from the potential health and safety of
special purpose or reinforcement products that do not meet the bio solubility criteria of
insulation made from glass. Rock Mineral Wool will replace the traditional Mineral Wool
label.Both are used in lieu of the Mineral Mineral Wool label.
J. UL GREENGUARD Gold Certification: (formerly known as GREENGUARD Children&
Schools Certification)offers stricter certification criteria,considers safety factors to account
for sensitive individuals(such as children and the elderly),and ensures that a product is
acceptable for use in environments such as schools and healthcare facilities. It is referenced by
both The Collaborative for High Performance Schools(CHPS) and the Leadership in Energy
Environmental Design(LEED)Building Rating Systems.
K. Declare and The Living Building Challenge-The Living Building Challenge is a philosophy,
advocacy tool and certification program that addresses development at all scales. The purpose
' of The Living Building Challenge is to define the most advanced measure of sustainability in
the built environment today and acts to diminish the gap between current limits and ideal
solutions. Declare supports The Living Building Challenge by providing a transparent
materialsdatabase that project teams can select from to meet Imperative 11.
L. Imperative 11,Red List-requires that manufacturers disclose the ingredients in their products
to insure that they are free of Red List chemicals and materials.The Red List represents the
"worst in class"materials, chemicals and elements known to pose serious risks to human
health and the greater ecosystem.
M. UL Classified: UL has tested and evaluated samples of the product with respect to certain
properties of the product. UL Classifies products to:
1. Applicable UL requirements.
2. Standards for safety.
3. Standards of other National and International organizations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.02 GLASS MINERAL WOOL, FLEXIBLE
A. Manufacturer:
1. Knauf Insulation;Atmosphere Duct Wrap with Ecose Technology:
www.knaufusa.com.
? Johns Manville: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible,noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K'value: 0.29 at 75 degrees F,when tested in accordance with ASTM C177.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: <5.0 percent by weight per ASTM C1104.
111C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 7
23 07 13 -DUCT INSULATION 11
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film(FSK).
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch,when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
D. Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film,with
I
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
E. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:
I
1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation,black color.
F. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
2.03 GLASS MINERAL WOOL, RIGID
I
A. Manufacturer:
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com. I 2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. CertainTeed Corporation; Model "ToughGard®Rigid Liner Board":
www.certainteed.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
1. ASTM C1071,Type II.
2. 'K'value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F,when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177.
3. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
I
4. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.
5. Maximum Density: 4.25 lb/cu ft.
C. UL/ULC Classified per UL 723. Comply with ASTM C 1071 Type I and Type II,NFPA 90A,
and NFPA 90B;and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." UL
GREENGUARD Certified does not support the growth of mold, fungi, or bacteria per ASTM
C 1338 and meets UL Environment GREENGUARD Microbial Resistance Listing per UL
2824-"GREENGUARD Certification Program Method for Measuring Microbial Resistance".
UL/E validated to be formaldehyde free. DecaBDP Free.
2.04 INSULATION BOARD I
A. Manufacturer:
1. Knauf Insulation: w/ECOSE Technology: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. I 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
1. ASTM C795. I
2. 'K'value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F,when tested in accordance with ASTM C177.
3. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
4. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.
I
5. Maximum Density: 4.25 lb/cu ft.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 7
I
I
23 07 13 -DUCT INSULATION
I
2.05 JACKETS
A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant
I lagging adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive:
a. Compatible with insulation.
IB. Glass Mineral Wool (Outdoor)Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, 50 lb/square.
C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
1. Thickness: 0.020 inch sheet.
2. Finish: Embossed.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective
Iliner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.
I2.06 DUCT LINER
A. Manufacturers:
1
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.
2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
1
4. CertainTeed Corporation; Model"ToughGard®Duct Liner": www.certainteed.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
I B. Insulation: Non-corrosive,incombustible glass mineral wool complying with ASTM C 1071;
mat faced air stream surface and edges coated with acrylic polymer.
1. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G 21.
I 2. UL GREENGUARD Certified does not support the growth of mold, fungi,or bacteria
per ASTM C 1338
3. Meets UL Environment GREENGUARD Microbial Resistance Listing per UL
2824-"GREENGUARD Certification Program Method for Measuring Microbial
IResistance"
4. DecaBDP Free.
5. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F.
6. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.
7. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm,minimum.
8. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
Ia. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.45.
b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.70.
c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.80.
d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.85.
C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel.
1
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 7
23 07 13 -DUCT INSULATION
1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION '
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. '
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with integral vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves,hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system'including fittings,joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required,bevel and seal ends of
insulation. '
E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
F. Exterior Applications: Provide board insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with with
calked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.
G. External Duct Insulation Blanket or Board Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with mechanical fasteners and seal jacket joints
with vapor barrier tape to match jacket.
2. Secure board insulation without vapor barrier with mechanical fasteners(pins and
speed washers).
3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use mechanical fasteners where necessary to
prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive or
FSK tape made for duct wrap or FSK board.
5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation
without disturbing wrapping.
H. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase
duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
6. Refer to SMACNA publication for transverse edges for velocities over 2500 fpm.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 7
23 07 13 -DUCT INSULATION
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Combustion Air Duct:
1. Flexible Glass Mineral Wool Duct Insulation: Minimum 2 inches thick or R-value of
7.
' B. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings:
1. Flexible Glass Mineral Wool Duct Insulation: Minimum 2 inches thick or R-Value of
8.
' C. Outside Air Intake Ducts:
1. Flexible Glass Mineral Wool Duct Insulation: Minimum 2 inches thick or R-Value of
' 8
D. Supply Ducts:
1. Flexible Glass Mineral Wool Duct Insulation: Minimum 1.5 inches thick or R-Value
' of 5.
E. Ducts Exposed to Outdoors:
1. Flexible or Rigid Glass Mineral Wool Duct Insulation: Minimum 2 inches thick or
' R-Value of 8.
END OF SECTION 23 07 13
1
1
1 1
i
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 7
23 10 05 -FUEL PIPING
SECTION 23 10 05 -FUEL PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
' A. Pipe,pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Gas.
' 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00-Firestopping.
' B. Section 08 31 00 -Access Doors and Panels.
C. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating.
D. Section 26: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
E. Section 31 23 16 -Excavation.
F. Section 31 23 23 -Fill.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME B16.3 -Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
' Engineers; 2013.
B. ASME B31.1 -Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013
(ANSUASME B31.1).
C. ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2013 (ANSUASME B31.9).
D. ASME(BPV IX) -Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX-Welding and Brazing
Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
E. ASTM A53/A53M- Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless; 2013.
F. ASTM A234/A234M- Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel
and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2013.
' G. ASTM B1 -Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire; 2013.
H. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.
I. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
' Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.
J. ASTM D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire
' and Cable; 2012.
K. ASTM D2683 -Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside
Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2010.
L. AWWA C105/A21.5 -Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American
Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5).
M. ICC-ES ACO1 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009.
N. ICC-ES AC106-Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry
Elements; 2006.
O. ICC-ES AC193 -Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 9
23 10 05 -FUEL PIPING
p
P. ICC-ES AC308 -Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements; 2009.
Q. MSS SP-78 -Cast lion Plug Valves,Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
R. MSS SP-89 -Pipe Hangers and Supports -Fabrication and Installation Practices;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
S. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code;National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS '
A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings,valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Valve Repacking Kits: Two for each type and size of valve.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with all applicable local codes and standards.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME(BPV IX) .
D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME(BPV
E. Identify pipe with marking including size,ASTM material classification,ASTM specification,
water pressure rating.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable plumbing code.
B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
installation of backflow prevention devices. ,
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Store pipe on sleepers, a
minimum of 4 inches above surrounding grade, at all times.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. ,
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 9
23 10 05-FUEL PIPING
1
' PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black.
' 1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M,wrought steel welding type.
2. Joints: ASME B31.1,welded.
3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer,half-lapped 10 mil
polyethylene tape.
B. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.
' 1. Fittings: ASTM D 2683 or ASTM D 2513 socket type.
2. Joints: Fusion welded.
2.02 NATURAL GAS PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
' A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3,malleable iron,or ASTM A 234/A 234M,wrought steel
welding type.
2. Joints: NFPA 54,threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.
2.03 FLANGES,UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
' B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges;
preformed neoprene gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges;preformed neoprene gaskets.
C. Dielectric Connections: Bronze threaded nipple,minimum 3 inches long,with impervious
' isolation liner. Victaulic "Clearflow".
2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
' A. Manufacturers:
1. Tolco Inc.
2. Anvil.
3. Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite.
4. Michigan Hanger Company,Inc.
5. PHD Manufacturing Co.
' 6. Superstrut.
7. Unistrut.
8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Fuel Piping:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,
' split ring.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel,adjustable, clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and
hanger rods.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 9
23 10 05 -FUEL PIPING
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
Pp
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp.
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
a. Isolate riser clamp from structure by use of Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite
#274 or#278 riser pad or Owner-approved equivalent.
8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,lock nut,nipple,floor flange,and
concrete pier or steel support.
9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring,adjustable,copper plated.
10. Use non-metallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
11. For vertical midspan support of piping 4 inches and under,use Hubbard
Enterprises/Holdrite Stout Bracket in conjunction with Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite
Stout Clamp or industry standard two-hole pipe clamp(MSS Type 26).
12. Secondary Pipe Positioning and Supports:
a. Makeshift, field-devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as the use of
scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping
shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96.
These are to be Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite support systems or approved
equal.
C. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners,as follows:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Powers Fasteners,Inc.: www.powers.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel,threaded both ends,threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. I
2.06 INSERTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Anvil Fig. 281.
2. PHD Fig 951.
3. Michigan Hanger Model 355EG.
4. Sulistitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Inserts: Carbon steel case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection
with lateral adjustment,top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to
suit threaded hanger rods.
2.07 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 9
23 10 05-FUEL PIPING
I
C. Lead Flashing:
I1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq.ft. sheet lead
2. Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq.ft. sheet lead.
D. Flexible Flashing: 1.85 inch thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
I
E. Caps: Steel,22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.08 SLEEVES
I A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams,Walls,Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
111 C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.
I
E. Sealant: Acrylic; refer to Section 07 90 05.
2.09 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. Model Series LS.
2. NMP Corporation.
, 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber
links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with
I bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements toexpand when tightened,providing
watertight seal and electrical insulation.
I 2.10 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Unistrut Model Series P1000.
I
2.
3. Superstrut Model Series 1200.
Michigan Hanger"0-Strut"Model A-12.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
IB. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel.With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
2.11 FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Specified Technology Inc. (STI) Model SpecSeal Series 100.
2. Dow Corning Corp.
111- 3. Hilti Corp.
4. International Protective Coating Corp.
5. 3M fire Protection Products.
I6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as
required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one
Itype for each similar application.
1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or multiple component silicone
elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.
I
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 9
23 10 05 -FUEL PIPING
2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or Multiple component foam compound.
3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound
mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.
4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber
stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.
5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible
fillers and silicone elastomer,covered with sheet stainless steel jacket,joined with
collars,penetration sealed with flanged stops.
6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to
surface heat gain.
7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. ,
2.12 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and
suitable for required fire ratings.
B. Dam Material: Permanent:
1. Mineral fiberboard.
2. Mineral fiber matting.
3. Sheet metal.
4. Plywood or particle board.
5. Alumina silicate fire board.
C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners,temporary stops or dams, and other
devices required to position and retain materials in place.
D. General:
1. Furnish UL listed products.
2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
E. Non-Rated Surfaces:
1. Stamped steel,chrome plated,hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling
plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed.
2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to
continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type
wall sleeve.
2.13 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hammond Valve Co.; Model 8501/8901: www.hammondvalve.com.
2. Nibco, Inc.;Model T-FP-600/T-585-70: www.nibco.com.
3. Watts; Model FBV-1/B-6000: www.watts.com.
4. Stockham; Model S216-BR-R-T: www.stockham.com.
5. Apollo; Model 70-100: www.conbraco.com.
6. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model BA-125/BA-100: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Up to and including 3 inches: '
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 9
I23 10 05-FUEL PIPING
I piece body,chromeplated brass ball,
MSS SP 110,Class 150, 600 WOG,bronze,two p ec y,
full port,teflon seats and stuffing box ring,blow-out proof stem, lever handle solder or
Ithreaded ends.
2.14 PLUG VALVES
I A. Manufacturers:
1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com.
2. Nibco, Inc.: www.nibco.com.
I
3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Construction 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug,
Ipressure lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or threaded ends. Provide lever
operator with set screw.
IPART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
IA. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
IA. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside,before assembly.
IC. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
I A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
Iwalls.
D. Install piping as high as possible,through open web trusses to maintain headroom, conserve
space, and not interfere with use of space.
I
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or
Iconnected equipment.
G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of
access doors with Section 08 31 00.
I
H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 ft of cover.
I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,brush clean,
I and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
J. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
K. Prepare exposed,unfinished pipe, fittings, supports,and accessories ready for finish painting.
IRefer to Section 09 90 00.
L. Excavate in accordance with Section 31 23 16.
I
M. Provide tracer wire over top of piping.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 9
23 10 05 -FUEL PIPING
1. Construction: ,
a. Conductor: Solid or stranded copper per spec ASTM B-1, B-3,or B-8.
b. Insulation: High Molecular Weight Polyethylene(HMWPE) ASTM D-1248.
Various insulation colors dependant on usage.
c. Temperature: 70 degrees C dry and wet.
d. Voltage: 20 and 30 Mil= 30 to 300 volts. 45 Mil=600 volts.
N. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 23.
0. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal,not inverted.
P. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.
Q. Install fuel oil piping to ASME B31.9.
R. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions,walls and floors.
S. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4
inches.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. For pipe runs of 1 inch or less and ran high and tight to the structure,use Hubbard
Enterprises/Holdrite#121 or#125 Series Brackets in conjunction with Hubbard
Enterprises/Holdrite#260 or#400 Series Inserts or approved equal.
6. Where inserts are omitted,drill through concrete slab from below and provide I through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush
with slab.
T. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9 and MSS SP-89.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
111
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation,provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or sheet lead packing
between hanger or support and piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers
and supports located in crawl spaces,pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not
considered exposed.
10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to
Section 23 05 48.
11. Support of pipe tubing and equipment is to be accomplished by means of engineered
products specific to each application. Makeshift field devised methods will not be
allowed. '
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 8 of 9
23 10 05 -FUEL PIPING
1
3.04 APPLICATION
' A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to
pipe.
C. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment,part of systems, or vertical
risers.
D. Install ball valves for throttling,bypass, or manual flow control services.
E. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
' 3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution
piping to have initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg. Provide regulators on each line serving
gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment.
END OF SECTION 23 10 05
U
I
I
I
U
1
I
1
I
1
U
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 9 of 9
23 31 00-HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
SECTION 23 31 00-HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
' PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal ductwork.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16-Volatile Organic Compound(VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 07 84 00 -Firestopping.
D. Section 09 90 00-Painting and Coating: Weld priming,weather resistant,paint or coating.
E. Section 11 40 00-Foodservice Equipment: Supply of kitchen range hoods for placement by
this Section.
F. Section -HVAC Air-Distribution System Cleaning: Cleaning ducts after completion of
installation.
G. Section 23 37 00-Air Outlets and Inlets.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
' A. ASTM A36/A36M-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
B. ASTM A653/A653M- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process;2015.
C. ASTM A1008/A1008M- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural,High-Strength Low-Alloy,High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.
D. ASTM A1011/A1011M-Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy,High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability,and Ultra-High Strength; 2014.
E. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
' 2015a.
F. ICC-ES ACO1 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.
G. ICC-ES AC106 -Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry
Elements;2012.
H. ICC-ES AC193 -Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2013.
' I. ICC-ES AC308 -Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements; 2013.
J. NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.
K. NFPA 90B-Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems;
2015.
L. NFPA 96-Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
' Operations; 2014.
M. SMACNA(DCS)-HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 4
23 31 00-HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials,duct liner, duct connections,and duct fittings.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit duct fabrication drawings,drawn to scale not smaller than 1/4 inch
equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same size as Contract Documents, indicating:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections,
details of components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust
duct systems, indicate classification of materials handled as defined in this section.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcing details and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction details.
6. Penetrations through fire rated and other walls.
7. Terminal unit,coil, and humidifier installations.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment,vibration isolation,
and duct attachment.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures for glass fiber ducts.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork meet or exceed
recommended fabrication and installation requirements.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record
changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section,with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this
section,with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A,NFPA 90B,and NFPA 96 standards.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS ,
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet,ASTM A653/A653M FS Type
B,with G90/Z275 coating.
B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening,water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration
and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class
of ducts.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 4
23 31 00-HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
I2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L,excluding water.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero,
I when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled.
5. Products:
a. Duro-Dyne; Model DSW: www.durodyne.com.
b. Hard Cast; Model RTA 50: www.hardcast.com.
c. Hard Cast; Model"Versa-Grip" 102: www.hardcast.com.
I d. Sika; Model "Sikaflex": www.sika.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
IC. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel,galvanized; threaded both ends,threaded one end, or
continuously threaded.
D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners,as follows:
I 1.
2. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
I 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
I 7. Manufacturers:
a. Powers Fasteners, Inc.: www.powers.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
IE. All Ducts: Galvanized steel,unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
I A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-
Metal and Flexible,and as indicated.
B. Duct systems have been designed for metal duct.
IC. Provide duct material,gages,reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
D. Construct T's,bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
I centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used,provide air foil
turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
E. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is
I indicated.
F. Increase duct sizes gradually,not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
Idownstream.
G. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree
conical tee connections may be used.
IH. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver
frame,provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct,
painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.
2.03 DUCT MANUFACTURERS
A. Streimer Sheet Metal: www.streimer.com.
I
IlTIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 4
23 31 00-HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
B. Rolok Products: www.rolok.com.
C. Arctic Sheet Metal: www.arctic sheetmetal.com.
D. Arjae Sheet Metal: www.arjae.com.
E. Robert Lloyd Sheet Metal: www.rlsm.net.
F. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards -Metal and Flexible.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
D. Use sealant on all lapped round duct joint connections. Seal all ducts in accordance with State
Energy Code. I
E. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts,maintain sizes inside lining.
F. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can
with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in
insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
H. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with
crimp in direction of air flow.
I. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards -Metal and Flexible. I
J. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
K. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not
use flexible duct to change direction.
L. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of
flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
M. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure
holds door in closed position.
N. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame. 1
END OF SECTION 23 31 00
I
I
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 4
I23 74 12-PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS-SMALL CAPACITY
ISECTION 23 74 12 -PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS - SMALL CAPACITY
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
IA. Packaged roof top unit.
B. Roof mounting curb.
IC. Maintenance service.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
I A. Section 23 05 48 -Vibration Isolation and Sound and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment.
B. Section 23 05 49 - HVAC Seismic Restraint.
IC. Section 23 33 00-Air Duct Accessories.
D. Division 26: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
I1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSUAMCA Standard 500-D-07, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating";
2007.
IB. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus; American Society
for Testing and Materials.
IC. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code;National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
l A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies
required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and
I connection requirements, and duct connections.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies
required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and
I connection requirements, and duct connections.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and
include start-up instructions.
IE. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions,maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
I F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
I 1. See Section 01 6000-Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Filters: One set for each unit.
3. Fan Belts: One set for each unit.
I1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
I
specified in this section,with minimum 10 years of documented experience.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 5
23 74 12-PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS-SMALL CAPACITY
B. Products u
Req girin Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I
A. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place,
ready for immediate installation of units. I
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors and heat
exchangers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. York International-Contact York National Account sales team for referred vendor
pricing(800-481-9738) or email at be-yorknaquoates@jci.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Self-contained,packaged,factory assembled and wired,consisting of
roof curb, cabinet, supply fan,refrigerant cooling coil, compressor,refrigeration circuit,
condenser, gas-fired heating section, electric or hot water heating coil, air filters,mixed air
casing, controls, and accessories.
C. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Roof Mounting Curb: 14 inch high, galvanized steel,channel frame with gaskets,nailer strips.
Full perimeter type for mounting under entire unit.
111
E. Cabinet:
1. Designed for outdoor installation with weatherproof construction.
2. Panels: Constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel finish meeting salt spray
test in accordance with ASTM B117. Furnish access doors or removable access
panels.
3. Insulation: Factory applied to exposed vertical and horizontal panels, 1/2-inch thick
aluminum foil faced foam or glass fiber with edges protected from erosion.
F. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type,resiliently mounted with direct drive (under 3
tons) and V-belt drive or adjustable variable pitch motor pulley(3 tons and over) and high I
efficiency motor. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection.
G. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Galvanized drain
pan with piping connection. Factory leak tested under water.
H. Compressor: Hermetically sealed,resiliently mounted with positive lubrication,and internal
motor overload protection. Furnish vibration isolators and short cycle protection.
I. Refrigeration circuit: Furnish the following for each circuit: fixed orifice control (under 3
tons)or thermal expansion valve(3 tons and over), filter-drier, suction, discharge, and liquid
line service valves with gauge ports,high and low pressure safety controls. Dehydrate and
factory charge each circuit with oil and refrigerant.
J. Condenser:
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 5
I23 74 12-PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS-SMALL CAPACITY
I1. Coil: Copper tube with aluminum or copper fin coil assembly. Factory leak tested
under water.
I 2. Condenser Fan: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced.
Wired to operate with compressor. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in
thermal overload protection. Furnish high efficiency fan motors.
IK. Gas-Fired Heating Section:
1. Fuel:Natural gas.
2. Heat Exchangers: Stainless steel.
I3. Gas Burner: Induced draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply,pressure
regulator, gas valves,manual shut-off,intermittent spark or glow coil ignition and
flame sensing device. Require unit fan operation before allowing gas valve to open.
IL. Air Filters: 2 thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames. 30 percent efficiency based
on ASHRAE 52(MERV 8 based on ASHRAE 52.2).
M. Mixed Air Casing:
I 1. Damper Leakage: Furnish Class I motorized dampers with maximum leakage rate of 4
cfm per square foot at 1-inch water column pressure differential when tested in
I 2. accordance with AMCA 500D.
Economizer: Factory installed fully modulating motorized outside air and return air
dampers controlled by dry bulb or enthalpy controller with minimum position setting.
I Outside air damper normally closed and return air damper normally open. Furnish
barometric relief damper capable of closing by gravity(3 tons and under) and
barometric relief damper with powered exhaust(above 3 tons). Furnish rain hood with
I screen.
N. Controls:
1. Thermostat: 7 day programmable electronic space thermostat with 2 stage heating and
I 2 stage cooling(7-1/2 tons and larger)with automatic changeover and heating setback
and cooling setup capability. Furnish system selector switch off-heat-auto-cool and
fan control switch,auto-on.
I O. Accessories:
1. Convenience Outlet: Factory installed, 115 volt, 15 amp, GFCI type, internally
mounted.
I 2. Roof Curb Package.
3. Accessories: Refer to drawing schedule.
P. Capacity:
1 1. Refer to Drawing schedules.
2.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
11 A. Electrical Characteristics: In accordance with Division 26.
B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted,non-fused type, interlocked with access door, accessible
from outside unit,with power lockout capability.
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
I3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop
IIIdrawings.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 5
23 74 12-PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS -SMALL CAPACITY
that B. Verify proper supplyis available.
p power
3.02 INSTALLATION
111
A. Roof Curb:
1. Assemble roof curb.
2. Install roof curb level.
3. Coordinate curb installation and flashing with Architect.
4. Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and
utility services.
5. Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb.
B. Install units on vibration isolators. Refer to Section 23 0548.
C. Connect units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. Refer to Section 23 1
3300.
D. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to splash block on roof
E. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.
F. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
G. Install control wiring between unit and field installed accessories.
H. Remove from roof and dispose off-site panels removed from units during installation of
economizer and dampers.
I. Locate remote panels as indicated on Drawings.
J. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
3.03 INSTALLATION-NATURAL GAS HEATING SECTION 111
A. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.,
B. Connect natural gas piping to unit, full size of unit gas train inlet. Arrange piping with
clearances for burner service.
C. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 23
1113.
1. Strainer.
2. Pressure gage.
3. Shutoff valve.
4. Pressure reducing valve.
D. Install natural gas piping accessories above roof,within unit casing, or below roof.
3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Section 01 4000-Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer's field services.
B. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing
and checkout.
C. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of one day to leak test, I
refrigerant pressure test, evacuate, dehydrate,charge, start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct
Owner on operation and maintenance.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Section 01 7000-Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 5
I23 74 12-PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS -SMALL CAPACITY
IIB. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.
I C. Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at
Substantial Completion.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
IA. Section 01 7000 -Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.
B. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance.
I C. Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct
Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner,
provide at least 7 days notice to Architect/Engineer of training date.
IEND OF SECTION 23 74 12
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 5
161K''
MKE S ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
' 6915 S.W.Macadam Avenue,Suite 200,Portland,OR 97219
Phone:503-892-1188 FAX:503-892-1190
PLANET FITNESS SHELL at TIGRAD TOWN
SQUARE
Tigard, OR
Table of Contents
Division 26 — Electrical
' Section: Title:
26 05 01 Minor Electrical Demolition
26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 34 Conduit
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
26 24 13 Switchboards
' 26 24 16 Panelboards
1
!
!
5194 ETOC_CHECK SET
I26 05 01 -MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
ISECTION 26 05 01 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
IPART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
IA. Electrical demolition.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
I A. Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional requirements for
alterations work.
IPART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
1 A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
I3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.
1 B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
I D. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
I 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.
IC. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits,use
I personnel experienced in such operations.
D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete
and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize
I outage duration.
1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 7 hours before partially or completely
disabling system.
I2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted.
Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.
1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system.
2. Notify local fire service.
3. Make notifications at least 7 hours in advance.
1 4. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
I
IITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 3
26 05 01 -MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete 1
and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize
outage duration.
1. Notify Owner at least 7 hours before partially or completely disabling system.
2. Notify telephone utility company at least 7 hours before partially or completely
disabling system.
3. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
G. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete
and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize
outage duration.
1. Notify Architect at least 7 hours before partially or completely disabling system.
2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
H. The Contractor shall carefully review the Architect's project construction phase plan and
schedule and coordinate all work within those limitations.
I. The Contractor shall visit and become thoroughly familiar with the existing conditions prior to
bidding. Electrical outlets,devices and equipment shown dashed on the demo plans represent
existing devices to be demolished. Existing electrical outlets, devices and equipment to
remain are shown with "(E)" designation or otherwise specifically noted.
J. Coordinate work of Division 26 with that of other divisions prior to rough-in.
K. All existing electrical systems, including,but not limited to, light fixtures, conduit, and wiring
which are not to be demolished-shall be protected from damage during the demolition and
construction phases. Systems shall be operational in a manner consistent with the phasing
plan and construction schedule. I
L. Unless otherwise noted,remove all existing fixtures, clocks,horns, switches,receptacles, and
other wiring devices from surfaces scheduled for refinishing and reinstall new device. 1113.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Remove,relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. ,
C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors,and patch surfaces.
D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are
not removed.
E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has
been removed.
G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems,hangers, and other
accessories.
H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or
provide access panel as appropriate. '
J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical
installations, or as specified.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 3
26 05 01 -MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
K. All labor and materials required to change the existing electrical installation as indicated shall
be provided. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all existing interconnecting
components.
L. If abandoned or demolished outlets,switches,or other devices serve as feed through boxes for
I
other existing electrical equipment,which is being retained,new conduit and wire shall be
provided to bypass the abandoned outlets at no additional cost to the Owner. If existing
conduits pass through partitions,which are being removed or remodeled,new conduit and wire
shall be provided to route around the wall and maintain service to the existing load at no
additional cost to the Owner.
M. The Contractor shall have the option to reuse existing raceways as far as practical,provided it
remains code accessible,concealed by new work,and not in conflict with demolition. New
conductors installed in existing raceways shall be THHN/THWN. No existing cloth covered
conductors or cables shall be reused. Where existing raceways are used,provide supplemental
ground conductor to assure continuity of raceway system. Patch and paint walls where surface
conduits were removed. Provide stainless steel cover plates on all abandoned J-boxes.
N. All abandoned Class 2, Class 3,and PLTC cables are to be removed in accordance with
Article 725 of NEC.
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR
l A. See Section 01 74 19-Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional
requirements.
B. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.
C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit
directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
' D. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior
and interior surfaces;rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps,ballasts and broken
electrical parts.
' E. Owner shall have first right of salvage of any and all electrical materials and equipment
intended for demolition. Items not salvaged by the Owner shall become the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed from the site.
END OF SECTION 26 05 01
1
I
I
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 3
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19 -LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single conductor building wire.
B. Metal-clad cable.
C. Wiring connectors.
D. Oxide inhibiting compound.
E. Wire pulling lubricant.
F. Cable ties.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
' A. Section 26 05 26 -Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for
grounding conductors and grounding connectors.
B. Section 26 05 53 -Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.
B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,Hard,
' Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.
C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for
Electrical Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014).
' D. ASTM B787/B787M-Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded
Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004(Reapproved 2014).
E. ASTM B800 - Standard Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical
Purposes -Annealed and Intermediate Tempers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
F. ASTM B801 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conductors of 8000 Series
Aluminum Alloy Wire for Subsequent Covering of Insulation; 2007 (Reapproved 2012).
G. FS A-A-59544 -Cable and Wire, Electrical(Power, Fixed Installation); Federal Specification;
Revision A, 2008.
H. NEC 210.4(B) -Multiwire Branch Circuits-Disconnecting Means;National Electrical Code;
2008
I. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
1 J. NECA 104-Recommended Practice for Installing Aluminum Building Wire and Cable; 2012.
K. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable(AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); 2012.
L. NEMA WC 70-Nonshielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical
Energy; 2009.
M. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2013.
N. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 11
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
O. UL 44-Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 83 -Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate sizes of raceways,boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other
sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for
conductor sizes increased for voltage drop,material change, and quantity of
conductors in conduit. ,
2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide
terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. I
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors
and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction,ratings, listings, and
available sizes, configurations, and stranding.
C. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors
substituted for copper conductors. Include proposed modifications to raceways,boxes,wiring
gutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodate substituted conductors.
D. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,
examination,preparation, and installation of product.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual
routing for underground circuits.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution '
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Receive,inspect,handle,and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's I
instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower
than 14 degrees F,unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When
installation below this temperature is unavoidable,notify Architect and obtain direction before
proceeding with work.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 11
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
I
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
Iproduct listing.
B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise
I
indicated,permitted, or required.
C. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a.I Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible and non-accessible
ceilings,and under raised floors for branch circuits up to 20 A.
1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for
I circuit homerun from first outlet to panelboard.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions,may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
I b. Where exposed to view, except in dedicated electrical, communications, and
mechanical rooms where not subject to damage.
c. Where exposed to damage.
I d. For damp,wet, or corrosive locations,unless provided with a PVC jacket
listed as suitable for those locations.
e. For isolated ground circuits,unless provided with an additional
I isolated/insulated grounding conductor.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
B. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
C. American Insulated Wire: www.leviton.com.
ID. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
E. General Cable; www.generalcable.com.
IF. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
2.03 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I , A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.
ID. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required conduit,boxes,wiring,
connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
I E. Comply with NEMA WC 70.
F. Comply with FS A-A-59544 where applicable.
G. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.
IH. _ Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
I. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26.
1
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 11
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
J. Conductors and Cables Installed in Cable Tray: Listed and labeled as suitable for cable tray
use.
K. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled as '
sunlight resistant.
L. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air(only where
specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return air
plenums.
M. Conductor Material: ,
1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this
project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Provide copper conductors except where aluminum conductors are specifically 111indicated. Substitution of aluminum conductors for copper is not permitted. Conductor
sizes indicated are based on copper unless specifically indicated as aluminum.
Conductors designated with the abbreviation "AL" indicate aluminum.
3. Provide copper conductors except where aluminum conductors are specifically
indicated or permitted for substitution. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper
unless specifically indicated as aluminum. Conductors designated with the
abbreviation "AL" indicate aluminum.
a. Substitution of aluminum conductors for copper is permitted,when approved
by Owner and authority having jurisdiction, only for the following:
1) Services: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger.
2) Feeders: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger.
b. Where aluminum conductors are substituted for copper, comply with the
following:
1) Size aluminum conductors to provide,when compared to copper sizes
indicated, equivalent or greater ampacity and equivalent or less
voltage drop.
2) Increase size of raceways,boxes,wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. as
required to accommodate aluminum conductors.
3) Provide copper equipment grounding conductor sized according to
NFPA 70.
4) Equip electrical distribution equipment with compression lugs for
terminating aluminum conductors.
4. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper
conductors complying with ASTM B3,ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless
otherwise indicated. '
5. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.
6. Aluminum Conductors (only where specifically indicated or permitted for
substitution): AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors recognized by ASTM B800 1
and compact stranded in accordance with ASTM B801 unless otherwise indicated.
N. Minimum Conductor Size:
1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 11
1
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
111
O. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
IP. Conductor Color Coding:
1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having
I2. jurisdiction.Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded
I
using vinyl color coding electrical tape.
3. Color Code:
a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase,4 Wire System:
Ii) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
Ib. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
208Y/120 V, 3 Phase,4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
I
2)
3) Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral/Grounded: White.
IC.
d. Equipment Ground,All Systems: Green.
Isolated Ground,All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.
e. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.
I
2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Copper Building Wire:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2. Aluminum Building Wire(only where specifically indicated or permitted for
substitution):
Ia. Alcan Products Corporation/Alcan Cable: www.cable.alcan.com.
b. Prysmian Power Cables and Systems: www.us.prysmian.com.
c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
Id. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
I111 C. Conductor Stranding:
1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or Stranded.
I b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
2. Control Circuits: Stranded.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
IE. Insulation:
1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN,THHN/THWN-2, or XHHW-2, except
Ias indicated below.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 11
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2, THHN/THWN, or
THHN/THWN-2.
b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.
2. Aluminum Building Wire (only where specifically indicated or permitted for
substitution): Type XHHW-2 or RHH/RHW-2.
2.05 METAL-CLAD CABLE 1
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com.
2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
B. Description: NFPA 70,Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and
listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
C. Conductor Stranding:
1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or Stranded.
2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2.
F. Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required. 1
G. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.
H. Armor: Aluminum or steel, interlocked tape. •
I. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of
installed location.
2.06 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the
conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as
applicable.
B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 05 26.
C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: I
1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring
connectors or compression connectors.
2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use compression connectors. '
3. Connectors for Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors.
D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
terminations designed for terminal lugs.
2. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can
accommodate,provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size,but not111
less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.
3. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate
disconnection.
4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use compression connectors where
connectors are required OR for all connections.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 11
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
I5. Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors where connectors are required.
6. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for
I connections to terminal screws.
7. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals where connectors are
required.
IE. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with
conductors without stripping insulation.
F. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.
G. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications
and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as
I complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.
1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com.
I b. Ideal Industries,Inc: www.idealindustries.com.
c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
I H. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
I
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.
c. Thomas &Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
I1. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
Ib. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.
c. Thomas&Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
Id.
J. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated,with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable
for connection to be made.
I 1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.
c. Thomas&Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2.07 WIRING ACCESSORIES
IA. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be
installed.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
Y
b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com.
c. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.
Id. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
B. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed
Iand suitable for use at the installation temperature.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 11
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1. Manufacturers: ,
a. 3M: www.3m.com.
b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com.
c. Ideal Industries,Inc: www.idealindustries.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
C. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
.1111
B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. •
C. Verify that raceways,boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and
cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:
111
1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown,determine exact
routing required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location
shown. •
5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.
7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated,when branch circuits that
originate in the same panelboard are shown as separate, combining them together in a
single raceway is permitted,under the following conditions:
a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway.
Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors.
b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating.
c. Size raceways,boxes,etc. to accommodate conductors.
8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded
conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed
in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor
for each individual branch circuit.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. '
C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
D. Install aluminum conductors in accordance with NECA 104.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 8 of 11
26 05 1
9-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
E. Install metal-clad cableYP MC T e in accordance with NECA 120.
( )
' F. Installation in Raceway:
1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other
contaminants.
' 2.
3. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.
4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary,except when lubricant is not
recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Exposed Cable Installation(only where specifically permitted):
' 1.
2. Route cables parallel or perpendicular to building structural members and surfaces.
Protect cables from physical damage.
H. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same
' manner.
I. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports
' and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from
building structure. Do not provide support from raceways,piping,ductwork,or other systems.
1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support
l system.
Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay
on ceiling tiles.
2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds
permissible limits.
' J. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
1. Metal-Clad Cable(Type MC):
a. Use listed fittings.
' b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors
or insulation.Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.
' c. Do not use direct-bearing set-screw type fittings for cables with aluminum
armor.
K. Install conductors with a minimum of 6 inches of slack at each outlet.
' L. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others,provide a
minimum of 5 feet of slack.
M. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes,wireways,panelboards and other equipment
enclosures.
N. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded
conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
0. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or
make splices in conduit bodies.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting,nicking or damaging conductors.
' 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,
oxides,and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 9 of 11
26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
5. Connections for Aluminum Conductors: Fill connectors with oxide inhibiting
compound where not pre-filled by manufacturer.
6. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings.
7. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended
tools and dies.
P. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for
the application,with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced
conductors.
1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,
electrical tape,or heat shrink tubing.
a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing
electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl
insulating electrical tape.
b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering, including motor leads,
first apply varnished cambric electrical tape, followed by adequate amount of
rubber splicing electrical tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating
electrical tape.
2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,
electrical tape,or heat shrink tubing.
a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture
sealing electrical tape.
b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply
outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.
3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.
Q. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
R. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of
integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under"Color Coding", apply half
overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.
S. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
T. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified.
U. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide final connections to all equipment and
devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
V. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
Contractor shall comply with NEC 210.4(B)by providing a separate neutral conductor for
each circuit in a multi-wire branch circuit.
W. Support cables above accessible ceiling,using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to '
support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling
panels. Do not attach cables to slack wires. Plastic cable ties shall be plenum rated in plenum
spaces. 1
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform inspection,testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. I
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 10 of 11
26 05 19 -LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation
resistance test is only required for services and feeders.
1. Disconnect surge protective devices(SPDs)prior toperforming any high potential
testing.Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs
connected.
' D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
1
1
1
r
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 11 of 11
I26 05 26-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 26 -GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
IA. Grounding and bonding requirements.
B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.
C. Connectors forgrounding and bonding.
D. Ground bars.
E. Ground rod electrodes.
I1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 19-Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional
Irequirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.
B. Section 26 05 53 -Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
I1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface
IPotentials of a Grounding System; 2012.
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
I C. NEMA GR 1 -Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2007.
D. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2013.
I E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 467 -Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
111 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
I1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with
specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.
I 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
I B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
IA. See Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and
I bonding system connectors.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection, examination,
I
preparation, and installation of product.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 6
26 OS 26-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D. Field quality control test reports.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system
components and connections.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. '
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,
A. Receive, inspect,handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be
reused,they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity
are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required components, conductors,
connectors, conduit,boxes,fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
grounding and bonding system.
D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
E. Grounding System Resistance:
1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless
otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not
constitute normally dry conditions.
2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms OR 25 ohms to ground,when
tested according to IEEE 81 using"fall-of-potential" method.
3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames,
. System Neutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms,when tested
according to IEEE 81 using"point-to-point" methods.
F. Grounding Electrode System:
1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to
form grounding electrode system.
a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.
b. Install grounding electrode conductors in non-metallic raceway where
exposed to physical damage.
2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):
a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection(where
present)water service pipe(s)that are in direct contact with earth for at least
10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of
entrance to the building.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 6
I26 OS 26-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Ib. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make
pipe electrically continuous.
I c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit
removal of meter without disconnecting jumper.
3. Metal Building or Structure Frame:
I a. Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded
in accordance with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location.
4. Concrete-Encased Electrode:
I a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than
20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller
than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct
I
contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.
5. Ground Ring:
a. Provide a ground ring encircling the building or structure consisting of bare
I copper conductor not less than 2 AWG in direct contact with earth,installed
at a depth of not less than 30 inches.
b. Where location is not indicated,locate ground ring conductor at least 24
I c. inches outside building perimeter foundation.
Provide connection from ground ring conductor to:
1) Perimeter columns of metal building frame.
U
2) Ground rod electrodes located as indicated,not more than 30 feet
apart,and at each corner of the building/structure.
6. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for
I common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as
permitted in NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for
service-supplied system grounding to this ground bar.
I a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 4 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or
required.
b. Where ground bar location is not indicated,locate in accessible location as
I
c. near as possible to service disconnect enclosure.
Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless
otherwise indicated.
7. Ground Riser:Provide common grounding electrode conductor not less than 3/0 AWG
Ifor tap connections to multiple separately derived systems as permitted in NFPA 70.
G. Service-Supplied System Grounding:
I1For each service disconnect,provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral
.
(grounded)service conductor to grounding electrode system.Unless otherwise
indicated,make connection at neutral(grounded)bus in service disconnect enclosure.
I 2. For each service disconnect,provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral
(grounded)bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any
other connections between neutral(grounded)conductors and ground on load side of
I service disconnect.
2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
General Requirements:
IA.
1. Provide products listed,classified,and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc.
(UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the
purpose indicated.
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 6
26 05 26-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I
2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. 1
B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 26 05 19:
1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.
I
a. Exceptions:
1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct
contact with earth.
2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete(not
in raceway).
2. Factory Pre-fabricated Bonding Jumpers: Furnished with factory-installed ferrules;
I
size braided cables to provide equivalent gauge of specified conductors.
C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:
I
1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors
and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,
I
concealed and other inaccessible connections.
a. Exceptions:
1) Use mechanical connectors for connections to electrodes at ground
I
access wells.
3. Unless otherwise indicated,use mechanical connectors or exothermic welded
connections for accessible connections.
I
a. Exceptions:
1) Use exothermic welded connections for connections to metal building
frame.
4. Manufacturers -Mechanical and Compression Connectors:
I
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
b. Harger Lightning& Grounding: www.harger.com.
c. Thomas &Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
I
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
5. Manufacturers-Exothermic Welded Connections:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
b. Cadweld, a brand of Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.
c. ThermOweld, a brand of Continental Industries,Inc:
www.thermoweld.com/#sle.
I
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
D. Ground Bars:
I
1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.
2. Size: As specified herein.
3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.
I
4. Manufacturers:
a. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.
b. Harger Lightning&Grounding: www.harger.com.
c. ThermOweld, a brand of Continental Industries,Inc:
www.thermoweld.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. I E. Ground Rod Electrodes:
1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.
2. Material: Copper-bonded(copper-clad) steel.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 6
I
I26 05 26-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I3. Size: 5/8 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Where rod lengths of greater than 10 feet are indicated or otherwise required,
I sectionalized ground rods may be used.
. Manufacturers:
a. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.
I b. Galvan Industries, Inc: www.galvanelectrical.com.
c. Harger Lightning& Grounding: www.harger.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
I3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove paint,rust,mill oils, and surface contaminants at connection points.
I 3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been
completed.
IB. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
I3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in
accordance with NECA 1.
C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.
I Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation,install at 45 degree angle or bury
horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70.
1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches
V 2. below finished grade.
Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches of top of rod
exposed.
I D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting,nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate
I insertion into connector.
2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and
contact surfaces.
I 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the
items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
I recommended torque settings.
E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
I 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform inspection,testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 6
26 05 26-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within
the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.
E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with
specified requirements.
F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 6
26 OS 29-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FORELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
C. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable,boxes, and other electrical
work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Section 05 50 00-Metal Fabrications: Materials and requirements for fabricated metal
supports.
C. Section 26 05 34-Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits.
D. Section 26 05 33.16-Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.
E. Section 26 51 00- Interior&Exterior Lighting: Additional support and attachment
requirements for interior luminaires.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2015.
B. ASTM A153/A153M- Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;
2013.
D. MFMA-4-Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.
E. ICC-ES ACO1 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009.
F. ICC-ES AC106-Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners(Screw Anchors) in Masonry
Elements; 2006
G. ICC-ES AC193 -Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010
H. ICC-ES AC308-Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
' Elements; 2009.
I. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
J. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
K. UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
I1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and
components to be installed.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials
required for installation.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 7
26 05 29-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting
surfaces at the installed locations.
4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork,piping, equipment and other
potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete
has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00. 1
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures. I
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel
(strut) framing systems,non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and
masonry anchors. 111
C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or
methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
D. Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC
Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES),provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.
E. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,protection,examination,
preparation, and installation of product. I
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70. 1
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
C. Comply with applicable building code. I
D. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements. I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS I
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide all required hangers,supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and
hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.
2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc.
(UL)or Intertek(ETL) as suitable for the purpose indicated,where applicable.
3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be
supported with a minimum safety factor of 5. Include consideration for vibration,
equipment operation,and shock loads where applicable.
4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing. i
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 7
26 05 29-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
5. Do not use wire,chain,perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless
specifically indicated or permitted.
6. Steel Components:Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment
where installed.
a. Indoor Dry Locations:Use zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
I b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel or stainless
steel unless otherwise indicated.
c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
I d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Materials for Metal Fabricated Supports: Comply with Section 05 50 00.
C. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps,clamps,etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be
supported.
1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds,a division of Eaton Corporation:
www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.
b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.
c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:
Iwww.emersonindustrial.com/#sle.
d. Thomas&Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
fD. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers,brackets,etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
1. Manufacturers:
I a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds,a division of Eaton Corporation:
www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.
b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.
I c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:
www.emersonindustrial.com/#sle.
d. Thomas&Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
E. Metal Channel(Strut)Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel
(strut) and associated fittings, accessories,and hardware required for field-assembly of
I supports.
1. Comply with MFMA-4.
2. Channel(Strut)Used as Raceway(only where specifically indicated): Listed and
labeled as complying with UL 5B.
3. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations:Use zinc-plated steel or galvanized steel.
I b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel or stainless
steel.
4. Minimum Channel Thickness: 14 gauge.
5.
6. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.
Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation:
Iwww.cooperindustries.com/#sle.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 7
26 05 29-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I
b. Thomas &Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. I
c. Unistrut,a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. I
F. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
1. Minimum Size,Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter. I
b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch(27mm)trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.
c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch(27mm)trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.
d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter. I
e. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.
f. Luminaires: 3/8 inch diameter.
G. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or
rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof
structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly,with support fixtures as specified.
1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing
assembly.
2. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as
indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports.
3. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component
to top of roofing.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation:
www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.
b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com. I
c. PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com.
d. Unistrut,a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. I
H. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted,use the anchor and
fastener types indicated for the specified applications.
2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts,expansion anchors, or screw anchors.
3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.
5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.
6. Steel: Use beam clamps,machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood: Use wood screws.
9. Plastic and lead anchors are not peg nutted.
10. Powder-actuated fasteners are permitted only as follows:
a. Where approved by Architect.
b. Use only threaded studs; do not use pins.
11. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are permitted only as follows:
a. Nails are permitted for attachment of nonmetallic boxes to wood frame
construction(when specified).
b. Staples are permitted for attachment of nonmetallic-sheathed cable to wood
frame construction(when specified).
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 7
I26 05 29-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I12. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel(strut)and spot inserts specifically
designed to be cast in concrete ceilings,walls, and floors.
a. Comply with MFMA-4.
b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.
c. Minimum Channel Thickness: 12 gauge.
I d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel(strut) framing system.
13. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC
Evaluation Service,LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.
I 14. Manufacturers -Mechanical Anchors:
a. Hilti,Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
b. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works,Inc:
I c. www.itwredhead.com/#sle.
Powers Fasteners,Inc:www.powers.com.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com.
I 15. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
Manufacturers-Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems:
a. Hilti,Inc:www.us.hilti.com.
I b. ITW Ramset, a division of Illinois Tool Works,Inc: www.ramset.com/#sle.
c. Powers Fasteners,Inc: www.powers.com.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com.
Ie. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
I A. Hangers, Supports,Anchors, and Fasteners-General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and
type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit,including weight of wire in conduit.
B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.
IC. Anchors and Fasteners:
1111 1. Obtain permission from Architect before using powder-actuated anchors.
2. Concrete Structural Elements:Use precast inserts,expansion anchors,or preset
inserts.
3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips,steel ramset fasteners,
or welded fasteners.
I 4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.
5. Hollow Masonry,Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow
wall fasteners.
6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
1 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
ID. Fastener Types:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
I 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types:As required.
7. Manufacturers:
Ia. Powers Fasteners,Inc: www.powers.com.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 7
26 05 29-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
E. Formed Steel Channel:
1. Manufacturer: Kindorf,Unistrut, B-Line, or approved. I
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
F. Steel Spring Clips:
1. Manufacturer: Caddy, Raco,T&B, B-Line.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements.
G. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or
rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane,not requiring any attachment to the roof
structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.
1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing
assembly.
2. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
3. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as
indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
4. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component
to top of roofing.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.
b. PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com.
c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION I
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system
components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts,mechanical equipment, or conduit.
2. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members.
B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with
adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. I
C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch
off wall.
E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in
hollow partitions.
F. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 7
26 05 29-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
G. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance
with NECA 1.
H. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services,LLC(ICC-ES)
evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.
I. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork,or other systems.
J. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect,do not provide support from suspended
ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
K. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect,do not provide support from roof deck.
L. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural
Engineer.
M. Field-Welding(where approved by Architect): Comply with Section 05 50 00.
N. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel(strut)to
support equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel(strut)secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on
hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel(strut)to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
I
4. locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
Unless otherwise indicated,mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch
high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies
on its own weight for support.
O. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 34.
P. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 33.16.
Q. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 51 00.
R. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage
during concrete pour.
S. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
T. Remove temporary supports.
U. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings(only where
specifically indicated or permitted)in accordance with NFPA 70.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.
C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment<components.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 7
' 26 05 34-CONDUIT
SECTION 26 05 34-CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC).
B. Intermediate metal conduit(IMC).
C. Electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
D. Conduit fittings.
E. Accessories.
1 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 19-Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal clad cable
(Type MC), armored cable(Type AC),and manufactured wiring systems,including uses
permitted.
B. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding.
C. Section 26 05 29-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 05 33.16-Boxes for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 05 53 -Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
F. Section 26 2701 -Group Metering Equipment: Additional requirements for electrical service
conduits.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC); 2005.
B. ANSI C80.3 -American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT); 2005.
C. ANSI C80.5 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit(ERAC);
2005.
D. ANSI C80.6-American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit(EIMC);
2005.
E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;2010.
F. NECA 101 -Standard for Installing Steel Conduits(Rigid, IMC,EMT); 2013.
G. NEMA FB 1 -Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable; 2012.
H. NEMA RN 1 -Polyvinyl-Chloride(PVC)Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
and Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2005.
I. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. UL 6-Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
K. UL 6A -Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass,and Stainless Steel; Current
Edition,Including All Revisions.
L. UL 514B -Conduit,Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 9
26 05 34-CONDUIT '
M. UL 797 -Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N. UL 1203 -Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in
Hazardous(Classified)Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I
O. UL 1242 -Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed,
including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members,ductwork,piping,
equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and
equipment installed under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the
integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work. I
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is
complete between outlet,junction and splicing points.
C. For projects with Post Tension(PT) slab construction, submit dimensioned plan showing all
conduit sleeves &block out locations to Architect for review.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: 111
1. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits
embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch(53 mm)trade size and larger.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements. I
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Receive,inspect,handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS I
2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70
and product listing.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 9
' 26 05 34-CONDUIT
B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted,use the conduit types indicated
for the specified applications.
C. Underground:
1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal
conduit(IMC),PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC
conduit.
2. Exterior,Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metallic conduit(IMC), or rigid PVC conduit.
3. Where rigid polyvinyl(PVC)conduit is provided,transition to galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit(IMC)where emerging from underground.
4. Where rigid polyvinyl(PVC)conduit larger than 2 inch(53 mm)trade size is
provided,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows or intermediate metal
conduit(IMC) elbows or fiberglass for bends in runs over 100 feet. For shorter runs
factory formed schedule 40 PVC elbows may be used.
5. 1.5 Inches Diameter and Smaller: For total conduit lengths between pull points over
100 ft.,use rigid steel elbows. For shorter overall lengths,rigid steel or Schedule 40
PVC may be used.
' 6. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth use where soil has a
resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive
based on soils report or local experience to provide supplementary corrosion
protection.
D. Embedded Within Concrete:
1. Within Slab on Grade(within structural slabs only where approved by Structural
Engineer):Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,intermediate metal conduit(IMC),
or rigid PVC conduit.
2. Within Slab Above Ground(within structural slabs only where approved by Structural
Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC),
electrical metallic tubing(EMT), or rigid PVC conduit.
3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground:Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit(IMC),electrical metallic tubing(EMT), or rigid PVC
conduit.
4. Where rigid polyvinyl(PVC)conduit is provided,transition to galvanized steel rigid
I
5. metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit(IMC)where emerging from concrete.
Where electrical metallic tubing(EMT)emerges from concrete into salt air,use
corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a
minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit emerges.
E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit(IMC),or electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit(IMC),or electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit(IMC),or electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
H. Interior,Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate
metal conduit(IMC).
I. Exposed, Interior,Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit(IMC),or electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 9
26 05 34-CONDUIT '
J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit(IMC).
1. Locations subject to physical damage include,but are not limited to: I
a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication
rooms or closets.
b. Where exposed below 20 feet in warehouse and manufacturing areas. 1
K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC),
or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
L. Concealed, Exterior,Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized
steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC),or electrical metallic tubing
(EMT).
M. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use rigid PVC conduit.
1. Corrosive locations include,but are not limited to:
a. Cooling towers.
b. Swimming pool equipment rooms.
N. Hazardous (Classified)Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate
metal conduit(IMC). ,
O. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.
P. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: I
1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
4. Vibrating equipment includes,but is not limited to:
a. Transformers.
b. Motors.
Q. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit or MC cable.
2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS r
A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused,they may be reused only
where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is
verified by pulling a mandrel through them.
B. Electrical Service Conduits/
C. Communications Systems Conduits. I
D. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26.
E. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.
F. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or
Intertek(ETL) as suitable for the purpose indicated.
G. Minimum Conduit Size,Unless Otherwise Indicated: I
1. Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch(16 mm)trade size.
2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch(21 mm)trade size.
3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch(16 mm)trade size.
4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch(16 mm) trade size.
5. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch(21 mm)trade size.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 9
I26 05 34-CONDUIT
1 6. Underground,Exterior: 3/4 inch(21 mm)trade size.
H. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
Iminimum size requirements specified.
2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
I A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube&Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.
2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com.
1 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.
B. Description:NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
IC. Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
I a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.
b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:
www.emersonindustrial.com/#sle.
I2. c. Thomas&Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 514B.
I 3. Hazardous(Classified)Locations:Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with
UL 1203 for the classification of the installed location.
4. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
I 5. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only.Threadless set screw and
compression(gland)type fittings are not permitted.
I2.04 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT(IMC)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube&Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.
I2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com.
3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.
I B. Description:NFPA 70,Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with
ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.
C. Fittings:
I 1. Manufacturers:
a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.
b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:
I c. www.emersonindustrial.com/#sle.
Thomas &Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com.
2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and
I 3. labeled as complying with UL 514B.
Hazardous(Classified)Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with
UL 1203 for the classification of the installed location.
1 4. Material:Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
5. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and
Icompression(gland)type fittings are not permitted.
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 9
26 05 34-CONDUIT
2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING(EMT)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube &Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.
2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com.
3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.
B. Description: NFPA 70,Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3
and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.
C. Fittings: I
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.
b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:
www.emersonindustrial.com/#sle.
c. Thomas&Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying I
with UL 514B.
3. Material: Use steel.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. I
4. Connectors and Couplings: Use set-screw type except when embedded in concrete.
Use concrete tight compression(gland)type in concrete.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. I
5. Damp or Wet Locations (where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.
6. Embedded Within Concrete(where permitted): Use fittings listed as concrete-tight.
Fittings that require taping to be concrete-tight are not acceptable. I
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based,minimum thickness of 10 mil.
B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the
conduit to be installed.
C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit r
and fittings to be installed.
D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.
E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be
installed.
F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the I
conduits to be installed.
PART 3 EXECUTION I
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. I
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 9
I26 05 34-CONDUIT
IB. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
I C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC)in accordance with NECA 101.
D. Install intermediate metal conduit(IMC)in accordance with NECA 101.
E. Conduit Routing:
1 1. Unless dimensioned,conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown,determine exact
routing required.
1 3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed,unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
I b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:
I
a. Across floors.
b. Across roofs.
c. Across top of parapet walls.
I d. Across building exterior surfaces.
6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest
possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or
I perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where
practical.
7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom,clearances,and access.
I 8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends
between pull points.
9. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.
I10. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
11. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps.Provide drain fittings at low points and at
sealing fittings where moisture may collect.
I 12. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other
systems.
13. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces.
14. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
I F. Conduit Support:
1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using
I suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from
piping,ductwork,or other systems.
I 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support
system.Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling
tiles.
I 4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.
a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to
provide space between conduit and mounting surface.
I 5. Use metal channel(strut)with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel
surface-mounted conduits.
6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.
I
1 TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 9
26 05 34-CONDUIT 1
7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel(strut)with 111
accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.
8. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops(only
where specifically approved).
9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is permitted only as follows:
a. Support of electrical metallic tubing(EMT)up to 1 inch(27 mm)trade size
111
concealed above accessible ceilings and within hollow stud walls.
10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.
11. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ,
comply with the most stringent requirements.
G. Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of
galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated,use
three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double
lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
5. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box
or enclosure,provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with
finished floor.
111
6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect
conductors.
7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical
continuity.
H. Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and
grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation.
Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible
point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.
6. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exterior wall below grade.
7. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity
of membrane.
8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings
and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations
are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system
and maintain roof warranty.
9. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.
10. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,
using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement,provide expansion
and expansion/deflection fittings or approved flexible connections to prevent damage to
enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes,but is not limited to:
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 8 of 9
II26 05 34-CONDUIT
I1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or
deflection.
I 2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride(PVC)
conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
I J. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be
installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.
I K. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
L. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
M. Do not cross conduits in slab.
IN. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
I P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes minimum.
IQ. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
IA. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
IC. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.04 CLEANING .
IA. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.05 PROTECTION
I A. Immediately after installation of conduit,use suitable manufactured plugs to provide
protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for
installation of conductors.
IEND OF SECTION 26 05 34
I
I
I
I
I
ITIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 9 of 9
26 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical identification requirements.
B. Identification nameplates and labels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating.
B. Section 26 05 19-Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for
power conductors and cables 600 V and less;vinyl color coding electrical tape.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
B. NFPA 70E- Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2015.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified
prior to fabrication of identification products.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings,
until identification products have been installed.
2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are
complete.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain whose
designations are changed as part of the new work.
B. Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and
control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Switchboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 5
26 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective I
device.
5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each
branch device.Identify spares.
b. Panelboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source.
4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label
for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards
without a door,use identification nameplate.
5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for
panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces. Identify load
type, circuit number,breaker size and number of poles, and circuit
load in volt-amps.
6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate
to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares.
c. Time Switches:
1) Identify load(s) served and associated circuits controlled. Include
location.
d. Enclosed Contactors:
1) Identify voltage and phase.
2) Identify configuration, e.g.,E.O.E.H. (electrically operated,
electrically held) or E.O.M.H. (electrically operated,mechanically
held).
3) Identify coil voltage.
4) Identify load(s) and associated circuits controlled. Include location.
2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.
b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any
combination of branch circuits, feeders,and services,use identification I
nameplate acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service
disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits
supplying that building or structure.Verify format and descriptions with
authority having jurisdiction.
c. Use identification nameplate or identification label at each piece of service
equipment to identify the available fault current and the date calculations
were performed.
3. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify equipment utilizing
series ratings,where permitted,in accordance with NFPA 70.
4. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with
remote disconnecting means.
5. Use identification label,identification nameplate, or handwritten text using indelible
marker on inside of door at each motor controller to identify nameplate horsepower,
full load amperes,code letter, service factor,voltage, and phase of motor(s)controlled.
6. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for
111
electrical equipment, such as switchboards,panelboards, industrial control panels,
meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require
examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 5
26 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
a. Minimum Size: 5 by 7 inches.
b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the
word message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do
not operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection
equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA
I
c. 70E for minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent.
Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on
equipment-specific data as indicated on the drawings:
I1) Include orange header that reads "WARNING" where calculated
incident energy is less than 40 calories per square cm.
2) Include red header that reads "DANGER"where calculated incident
I .
3) energy is 40 calories per square cm or greater.
Include the text"Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE
Required" or approved equivalent.
4) Include the following information:
' (a) Arc flash protection boundary.
(b) Incident energy.
1 (c) Hazard/risk category.
(d) PPE(personnel protective equipment)requirements.
(e) Nominal voltage.
(f) Shock hazard condition.
(g) Limited approach boundary.
(h) Restricted approach boundary.
(i) Prohibited approach boundary.
(j) Equipment identification.
(k) Date calculations were performed.
' C. Identification for Conductors and Cables: •
1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.
Less than 250 Volts Between Phases:
Phase A-Black
Phase B-Red
Phase C -Blue
Neutral-White
Ground-Green
2. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables: Comply with Section 27
10 00.
3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated
for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following
locations:
a. At each source and load connection.
b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.
c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the
enclosure.
4. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system
components for grounding electrode conductors.
5. Use underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables.
111 TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 5
26 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I
D. Identification for Raceways: I
1. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways.
E. Identification for Boxes: I
1. Fire Alarm System: Red.
2. For exposed boxes in public areas, do not color code.
3. Use handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits enclosed.
111
a. For exposed boxes in public areas,provide identification on inside face of
cover. I F. Identification for Devices:
1. Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 10 00.
2. Use identification label to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles.
3. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection,
where permitted.
2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
I
A. Identification Nameplates:
1. Manufacturers: I a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com.
b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.
c. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2. Materials:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates
suitable for exterior use.
3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated electrically non-conductive
phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.
a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is
greater than 4 inches. •
4. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched111
text.
5. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or
laser-etched text.
6. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1
inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.
B. Identification Labels:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com.
b. Brother International Corporation: www.brother-usa.com. 111
c. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels;UV, chemical,water,heat, and
abrasion resistant.
a. Use only for indoor locations.
3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text 11
unless otherwise indicated.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 5
I
26 05 53 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
' B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment:Enclosure front.
' 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door or enclosure front.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear
access.
4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.
8. Boxes: Outside face of cover unless otherwise noted.
9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
10. Devices: Outside face of cover.
C. Install identification products centered, level,and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws,rivets,
self-adhesive backing,or epoxy cement and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or
epoxy cement.
' 1. Do not use adhesives on exterior surfaces except where substrate can not be
penetrated.
E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion,with no bubbles or
wrinkles and edges properly sealed.
F. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.
G. Mark all handwritten text,where permitted,to be neat and legible.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 0140 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles,wrinkles, curling or other signs
of improper adhesion.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 5
111
26 24 13-SWITCHBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Switchboards.
B. Metering transformer cabinets.
C. Meter bases.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for supporting foundations and pads.
B. Section 26 05 26 -Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
B. NEMA KS 1 -Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches(600 Volts Maximum);2013.
C. NEMA PB 2 -Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; 2011.
D. NEMA PB 2.1 -General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation,and
Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.
E. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 891 -Standard for Safety Switchboards;Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures.
' B. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings,
fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown;
conduit entrance locations and requirements;nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars
per phase,neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,examination,
preparation,and installation of product.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of switchboards.
11 F. Maintenance Data: Recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 4
26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS
C. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose t
specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I
A. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and
mounted on shipping skids.
B. Store in a clean,dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only
with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal
components, enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Eaton Electrical: www.eatonelectrical.com. ■
B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.
C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. r
D. Siemens: www.sea.siemens.com.
2.02 SWITCHBOARDS I
A. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated
and specified.
B. Ratings:
1. Voltage and bus ampacity rating: As indicated on drawings.
2. Integrated Equipment Rating: Rating shall exceed available utility fault current.
3. Main service board shall be service entrance rated.
C. Bus Material: Copper or aluminum with tin plating, standard size.
D. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. '
E. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard.
F. Insulated Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard.
G. Fusible Switch Assemblies:NEMA KS 1, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with
externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in
ON position. Handle lock in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R or
Class J fuses, type as specified.
H. Fusible Switch Assemblies, 800 Amperes and Larger: Bolted pressure contact switches. Fuse
clips: Designed to accommodate Class L fuses.
I. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
1. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment
branch circuits.
2. Include shunt trip where indicated.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 4
111
26 24 13- SWITCHBOARDS
J. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for
the conductor materials and sizes indicated.
K. Metering Transformer Compartment: For utility company's use; compartment size, bus spacing
and drilling,door, and locking and sealing requirements in accordance with utility company's
' requirements.
L. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections,
suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Provide continuous current rating as
indicated.
M. Pull Box: Removable top and sides, same construction as switchboard.
1. Size as shown on Drawings.
' 2.
3. Set front back sufficient distance to accommodate circuit breaker lifting devices.
Provide insulating, fire-resistive bottom with separate openings for each circuit to pass
into switchboard.
' N. Enclosure: Type 1 - General Purpose.
1. Align sections at rear only.
2. Switchboard Height: 90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes.
1 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat
internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with
cadmium or zinc.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Sheet metal cabinet with hinged door, conforming to utility
company requirements,with provisions for locking and sealing.
1. Size: As required by utility.
B. Meter Base: As required by utility company.
C. Other Components: As required by utility company.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Shop inspect and test switchboard according to NEMA PB 2.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide concrete housekeeping pad under the provisions of Section 03 30 00.
B. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.
C. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer and as indicated on utility
company drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install switchboards in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship),NECA 400, and
NEMA PB 2.1.
' C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including
accommodations for any drawout devices.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 4
26 24 13 -SWITCHBOARDS
D. Where switchboard is indicated to be mounted with inaccessible side against wall,provide
minimum clearance of 1/2 inch between switchboard and wall.
E. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29. 1
F. Install switchboards plumb and level.
G. Unless otherwise indicated,mount switchboards on properly sized 4 inch high concrete pad
constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
I. Install all field-installed devices,components, and accessories. 1
J. Where accessories are not self-powered,provide control power source as indicated or as
required to complete installation.
K. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in switchboards.
L. Install switchboard in locations shown on drawings, according to NEMA PB 2.1.
M. Install transformer pad and/or vault,metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required
by utility company.
N. Install in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 400.
O. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard.
P. Install fuses in each switch.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I
C. For systems with adjustable trip circuit breakers,provide coordination study for review.
Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values indicated on coordination study.
Submit to Architect for review.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 26 24 13
1
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 4
26 24 16-PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16 -PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
' A. Power distribution panelboards.
B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 -Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 05 53 -Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-375 -Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal
Specification; Revision E, 2013.
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2015.
' D. NEMA 250 -Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
E. NEMA PB 1 -Panelboards; 2011.
F. NEMA PB 1.1 -General Instructions for Proper Installation,Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.
G. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2013.
H. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
' Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
I. UL 50 -Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 50E-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 67 -Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L. UL 489 -Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 869A- Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
N. UL 943 -Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL 1053 -Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1
1 TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 1 of 8
26 24 16-PANELBOARDS 111
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork,piping, ,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
111
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of
flush-mounted panelboards where indicated.
4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS 1
A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards,
enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage,main bus ampacity,
overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry
locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
D. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use '
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,
examination,preparation, and installation of product.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual
installed circuiting arrangements.
G. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance
procedures and intervals.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. I
2. Panelboard Keys: One for each panelboard installed.
3. See Section 26 28 13 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE I
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution I
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Receive,inspect,handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions ,
and NECA 407.
B. Store in a clean,dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water,construction debris, and traffic.
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 2 of 8
I26 24 16-PANELBOARDS
IC. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
panelboard internal components, enclosure,and finish.
- 1 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of
I
panelboards:
1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.
IPART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
I
A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.
B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.
I C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D. Siemens.
E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
IF. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same
manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained
' from a single supplier.
2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS
I A. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose indicated.
B. Unless otherwise indicated,provide products suitable for continuous operation under the
' following service conditions:
1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.
2. Ambient Temperature:
I a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104
degrees F.
C. Short Circuit Current Rating:
I1Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available
.
fault current at the installed location.
2. Listed series ratings are acceptable,except where not permitted by motor contribution
I
according to NFPA 70, acceptable only where specifically indicated, or not
acceptable.
3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.
ID. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service
equipment according to UL 869A.
E. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
I
installation. •
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
I
G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1. Provide fully rated neutral bus,with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit
requiring a neutral connection.
I
I
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 3 of 8
26 24 16-PANELBOARDS
2. Provide 200 percent rated neutral bus and lugs where oversized neutral conductors are
provided.
3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard,with a suitable lug
for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
4. Provide separate isolated/insulated ground bus where indicated.
H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
I
Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs,
gutter taps,or oversized lugs are provided.
c. Provide removable end walls for NEMA Type 1 enclosures.
d. Provide painted steel boxes for surface-mounted panelboards, finish to match
fronts.
3. Fronts:
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
b. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
J. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including
bussing,connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
K. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated,provide system listed
and labeled as complying with UL 1053.
1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are
used,provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.
2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip
companion overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips.
a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay
settings.
L. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to
achieve selective coordination.
M. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete
installation:
1. Feed-through lugs.
2. Main breaker.
3. Double lugs.
2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1,power and feeder distribution type,
circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings,configurations
and features as indicated on the drawings. 1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 4 of 8
I26 24 16-PANELBOARDS
B. Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or
Icopper conductors.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Compression.
I C. Bussing:
1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum or copper.
2. Ground Bus Material: Copper.
I D. Circuit Breakers:
1. Provide bolt on type.
2. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
I E. Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures as indicated.
2. Fronts: Provide trims to cover access to load terminals, wiring gutters, and other live
Iparts, with exposed access to overcurrent protective device handles.
2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle,trip-free,trip-indicating
circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS
I W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the
drawings.
2. Interrupting Capacity:
I a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the
short circuit current rating indicated,but not less than:
1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC.
I 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not
less than the short circuit current rating indicated.
I 3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs for circuit breaker frame sizes less than 400 amperes.
b. Provide compression lugs for circuit breaker frame sizes 400 amperes and
I c. above.
Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper
conductors of full breaker ampacity rating.
I 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element
for short circuit protection.
a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker
frame sizes 225 amperes and larger.
b. Provide interchangeable trip units for circuit breaker frame sizes 400 amperes
and larger.
I5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
6. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:
I a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as
complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel.
b. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30
mA for protection of equipment.
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 5 of 8
26 24 16-PANELBOARDS
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION 1
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are
consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1
B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1
(general workmanship),NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. t
E. Install panelboards plumb.
F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and
rough opening completely covered.
G. Mount panelboards such that the top of panelboard is 6 feet 6 inches above the floor or
working platform. Install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches
above the floor.
1. Dwelling Units: Mount load center to meet ADA accessible side reach location and
height per OSSC 1110.3.4.
H. Mount floor-mounted power distribution panelboards on properly sized 3 inch or 4 inch high
concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
I. Provide spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into
accessible space above ceiling.
1. 1 empty 1 inch for every 6 spare breaker pole spaces and spare breakers.
J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded
equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus.
2. Terminate branch circuit isolated grounding conductors on isolated/insulated ground
bus only. Do not terminate on solidly bonded equipment ground bus.
K. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
L. Multi-Wire Branch Circuits: Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in the
panelboard as required by NFPA 70.
M. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as required. 1
N. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as required.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 6 of 8
26 24 16-PANELBOARDS
O. Provide filler
aces p lates to cover unused s in panelboards.
p
P. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-energizing
essential loads where indicated.Also provide for the following:
1. Emergency and night lighting circuits.
' 2.
3. Fire detection and alarm circuits.
Communications equipment circuits.
4. Intrusion detection and access control system circuits.
' 5. Video surveillance system circuits.
Q. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
R. Provide computer-generated circuit directory for each lighting and appliance panelboard and
' each power distribution panelboard provided with a door, clearly and specifically indicating
the loads served. Identify spares and spaces.
' 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform inspection,testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00.
' B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section
7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than 800 amperes. Tests listed
' as optional are not required.
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
D. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as
required by NFPA 70.
1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The
' insulation-resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.
E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.
F. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.
G. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.
H. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and assist
' in inspection,testing, and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality control
submittals.
I. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.
' 3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard,rearrange circuits such that the difference between each
measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories
accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's
instructions.
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 7 of 8
26 24 16-PANELBOARDS I
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. 1
END OF SECTION 26 24 16 '
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
TIGARD PLANET FITNESS SHELL Page 8 of 8